Panasonic DMREX79EB, DMREX89EB Operating instructions

Panasonic DMREX79EB, DMREX89EB Operating instructions
P8 – 14
Operating Instructions
Quick Start Guide
DVD Recorder
Model No. DMR-EX89EB
DMR-EX79EB
The illustrations in these Operating Instructions show images of DMR-EX79.
Dear customer
Thank you for purchasing this product.
For optimum performance and safety, please read these instructions carefully.
Before connecting, operating or adjusting this product, please read the instructions completely.
Please keep this manual for future reference.
Note: “EB” on the packaging indicates the United Kingdom.
Trademark of the DVB Digital Video Broadcasting Project
[EX89] Declaration of Conformity No. 6566, 28th January 2009
[EX79] Declaration of Conformity No. 5956, 22nd October 2008
Notice for DVB functions
This DVD Recorder is for viewing and recording free to view channels only, not Pay TV or encrypted channels unless
connected to an external source capable of receiving Pay TV or encrypted channels.
This unit does not have an analogue broadcast tuner.
Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are applicable to the DMR-EX89 model only.
Region number supported by this unit
Region numbers are allocated to DVD recorders and DVD-Video according to where they are
sold.
 The region number of this unit is “2”.
 The unit will play DVDs marked with labels containing “2” or “ALL”.
Example:
2
ALL
2
3
5
Web Site: http://www.panasonic-europe.com
EB
RQT9463-B
until
2009/6/1
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 1
2009/04/27 11:45:28
Features
Convenient Functions!
Linked operations with the TV
Easy access to various functions
You can enjoy linked operations with the TV and
receiver by using VIERA Link or Q Link.
 Linked Operations with the TV (VIERA Link
“HDAVI Control™”/Q Link) ( 44)
You can access the main function quickly and
easily from FUNCTION MENU.
 FUNCTION MENU Display ( 43)
Select
a function
and an item.
FUNCTION MENU
VIERA
Remain
HDD
Playback
30:00 SP
Video
Picture
Music
Recording
Delete
You can access
selected function
easily.
Grouped Titles
Copy
TV Guide
Others
Drive Select
DELETE Navigator
HDD
OK
RETURN
VIDEO
10/10
Chantal Show
11/10
Dolphins
Previous
DIGA
VIERA remote control
Pause the TV programme you are
watching
 Pause Live TV (
43)
OK
RETURN
Select
MUSIC
2
Page 02/02
OPTION
PICTURE
Next
Previous
Next
FREEVIEW+TM functions
 Guide Link ( 22)
 Series recording (
 Split Programme (
34)
22)
Linked timer recordings with
external equipment
You can set the Timer Recordings on Digital
STB/Digital Satellite Receiver when it is
connected to this unit with Scart cable.
 EXT LINK ( 28)
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles
screen
High Quality Picture
HDMITM (V.1.3a with Deep Colour)
 Connection with HDMI terminal (
 Deep Colour ( 96)
12)
Easy to Find and Select!
Two or more titles recorded in the daily/weekly
or series timer recording mode are bundled and
displayed as one item.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
10/10
Chantal Show
Grouped Titles
11/10
Dolphins
VIDEO
PICTURE
MUSIC
2
Grouped title
Previous
OK
RETURN
OPTION
Page 02/02
Select
Next
Previous
Next
Digital Switchover
2
Starting in late 2007 and ending in 2012, TV services in the UK will go completely digital, TV region by
TV region. If you are missing any channels, it may be that they are not available in your area, or that your
aerial needs upgrading.
If you have any questions, please call Digital UK on 08456 50 50 50 or visit www.digitaluk.co.uk
Digital Switchover will cover a period of several weeks. When it starts some Digital TV programmes will be
missing.
You will need to retune your DVD Recorder each time this happens to recover your digital programmes.
To retune your DVD Recorder
“DVB Auto Setup” in the Setup menu (
71)
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 2
2009/04/27 11:45:28
Accessories
Please check and identify the supplied accessories. Use numbers indicated in parentheses when asking for
replacement parts.
(Product numbers correct as of April 2009. These may be subject to change.)
1 Remote control (N2QAYB000332)
1 AC mains lead (K2CT3CA00004)
 For use with this unit only. Do not use it
with other equipment. Also, do not use
cords for other equipment with this unit.
2 Batteries for remote control
(R6 Size)
1 RF coaxial cable
(K1TWACC00001)
Sales and Support Information
Customer Care Centre
 For customers within the UK: 0844 844 3852
 For customers within the Republic of Ireland: 01 289 8333
 Visit our website for product information
 E-mail: [email protected]
Direct Sales at Panasonic UK
 For customers: 0844 844 3856
 Order accessory and consumable items for your product with
ease and confidence by phoning our Customer Care Centre
Monday–Thursday 9.00 a.m.–5.30 p.m., Friday 9.30 a.m.–
5.30 p.m. (Excluding public holidays).
 Or go on line through our Internet Accessory ordering
application at www.panasonic.co.uk.
 Most major credit and debit cards accepted.
 All enquiries transactions and distribution facilities are
provided directly by Panasonic UK Ltd.
 It couldn’t be simpler!
 Also available through our Internet is direct shopping for a
wide range of finished products, take a browse on our website
for further details.
Interested in purchasing an extended guarantee?
Please call 0870 240 6284 or visit our website
www.panasonic.co.uk/guarantee.
Caution for AC Mains Lead
For your safety, please read the following text carefully.
This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug
for your safety and convenience.
A 5-ampere fuse is fitted in this plug.
Should the fuse need to be replaced please ensure that
the replacement fuse has a rating of 5-ampere and that it is
approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.
Check for the ASTA mark  or the BSI mark  on the body of
the fuse.
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover you must ensure that
it is refitted when the fuse is replaced.
If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until a
replacement cover is obtained.
A replacement fuse cover can be purchased from your local
dealer.
CAUTION!
IF THE FITTED MOULDED PLUG IS UNSUITABLE FOR
THE SOCKET OUTLET IN YOUR HOME THEN THE FUSE
SHOULD BE REMOVED AND THE PLUG CUT OFF AND
DISPOSED OF SAFELY.
THERE IS A DANGER OF SEVERE ELECTRICAL SHOCK
IF THE CUT OFF PLUG IS INSERTED INTO ANY 13AMPERE SOCKET.
WARNING: DO NOT CONNECT EITHER WIRE TO
THE EARTH TERMINAL WHICH IS MARKED WITH
THE LETTER E, BY THE EARTH SYMBOL  OR
COLOURED GREEN OR GREEN/YELLOW.
THIS PLUG IS NOT WATERPROOF—KEEP DRY.
Before use
Remove the connector cover.
How to replace the fuse
The location of the fuse differ according to the type of AC mains
plug (figures A and B). Confirm the AC mains plug fitted and
follow the instructions below.
Illustrations may differ from actual AC mains plug.
1. Open the fuse cover with a screwdriver.
Figure A
Figure B
Fuse cover
If a new plug is to be fitted please observe the wiring code as
stated below.
If in any doubt please consult a qualified electrician.
IMPORTANT
The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the
following code:
Blue: Neutral, Brown: Live.
As these colours may not correspond with the coloured markings
identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured Blue must be connected to the
terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured Black or
Blue.
The wire which is coloured Brown must be connected to the
terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured Brown or
Red.
2. Replace the fuse and close or attach the fuse cover.
Figure A
Figure B
Fuse
(5 ampere)
Fuse
(5 ampere)
3
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 3
2009/04/27 11:45:29
Safety precautions
Placement
Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct sunlight,
high temperatures, high humidity, and excessive vibration. These
conditions can damage the cabinet and other components, thereby
shortening the unit’s service life.
Do not place heavy items on the unit.
Voltage
Do not use high voltage power sources. This can overload the
unit and cause a fire.
Do not use a DC power source. Check the source carefully when
setting the unit up on a ship or other place where DC is used.
AC mains lead protection
Ensure the AC mains lead is connected correctly and not
damaged. Poor connection and lead damage can cause fire or
electric shock. Do not pull, bend, or place heavy items on the lead.
Grasp the plug firmly when unplugging the lead. Pulling the AC
mains lead can cause electric shock.
Do not handle the plug with wet hands. This can cause electric
shock.
Foreign matter
Do not let metal objects fall inside the unit. This can cause
electric shock or malfunction.
Do not let liquids get into the unit. This can cause electric shock
or malfunction. If this occurs, immediately disconnect the unit from
the AC mains supply and contact your dealer.
Do not spray insecticides onto or into the unit. They contain
flammable gases which can ignite if sprayed into the unit.
Service
Do not attempt to repair this unit by yourself. If sound is
interrupted, indicators fail to light, smoke appears, or any
other problem that is not covered in these instructions occurs,
disconnect the AC mains lead and contact your dealer or an
authorized service centre. Electric shock or damage to the unit
can occur if the unit is repaired, disassembled or reconstructed by
unqualified persons.
Extend operating life by disconnecting the unit from the AC
mains if it is not to be used for a long time.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942;
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and
worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and DTS 2.0 + Digital
Out are registered trademarks and the DTS logos and Symbol are
trademarks of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2008 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is
protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.
Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized
by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited
viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision.
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
 SDHC Logo is a trademark.
 Portions of this product are protected under copyright law and
are provided under license by ARIS/SOLANA/4C.
Plays DivX® video
DivX® is a registered trademark of DivX, Inc., and is used under
license.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.
Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of
Microsoft Corporation and third parties. Use or distribution of such
technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from
Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft subsidiary and third parties.
The FREEVIEW service is subject to coverage.
An aerial upgrade may be required. The FREEVIEW and
FREEVIEW+ words and logos are trade marks of DTV Services
LTD. DTV Services Ltd 2002, 2008.
4
Table of Contents
Getting Started
Features ................................................................................ 2
Accessories ........................................................................... 3
Sales and Support Information .............................................. 3
Caution for AC Mains Lead.................................................... 3
Safety precautions ................................................................. 4
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care ..................................... 6
Remote Control Information/Unit Care .................................. 7
Quick Start Guide
Location of Parts/Controls ............................................... 8
Remote Control .......................................................... 8
Main Unit .................................................................... 8
The Unit’s Display ...................................................... 9
Rear Panel ................................................................. 9
Basic Connection........................................................... 10
Connecting to a Television only ............................... 10
Connecting AC mains lead (included) ...................... 10
Adding a Digital Satellite Receiver: Connecting to
a Television and a Digital Satellite Receiver .......11
Connecting to a TV with an HDMI (High Definition
Multimedia Interface) Cable (not included) ........ 12
Setting the Channels and Clock .................................... 13
HDD and Disc Handling....................................................... 15
Usable Discs for Recording and Playback ............................... 15
Play-only Discs ........................................................................ 16
Discs that Cannot be Played ................................................... 16
Types of disc or title recorded on HDD for the type
of connected TV.................................................................. 16
USB Memory and Card Handling ........................................ 17
DivX files, Music files and Still Pictures (JPEG) .................. 18
Basic Operations
Watching Television ............................................................. 19
Watching Digital Satellite Programmes.................................... 19
Playback .............................................................................. 20
Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs ........ 20
Recording Television Programmes ..................................... 21
Timer Recording .................................................................. 22
Deleting Titles ...................................................................... 23
DELETE Navigator .................................................................. 23
Deleting Titles During Playback ............................................... 23
Advanced Features
Notes for Recording............................................................. 24
Advanced Recording ........................................................... 25
Recording Modes and Durations ............................................. 25
When the format confirmation screen is displayed .................. 26
When removing a Recorded or Copied Disc ........................... 26
Specifying the Recording Time ................................................ 26
Direct TV Recording................................................................. 26
Flexible Recording ................................................................... 27
Playing while you are recording ............................................... 27
Recording from a Digital Satellite Receiver ......................... 28
Manual Recording .................................................................... 28
Linked timer recordings with external equipment (SKY Digital
STB/digital satellite receiver)—EXT LINK........................... 28
Recording from an External Device ..................................... 29
Recording from a VCR, etc ...................................................... 29
Recording from a DV Camcorder ............................................ 29
Advanced Timer Recording ................................................. 30
Manual timer recordings .......................................................... 30
Language for broadcast with multi-audio or multi-subtitle ....... 30
To cancel a timer recording in progress ................................... 30
If the “Overlapped Timer Recording” screen appears .............. 31
Check, Change, Delete Programmes,
or Resolve Overlapping ...................................................... 31
To deactivate timer programme
(e.g. to interrupt a daily or weekly timer programming) ...... 31
Relief Recording ...................................................................... 32
Auto Renewal Recording ......................................................... 32
Making timer recordings on the television .............................. 32
Notes on timer recording ......................................................... 32
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 4
2009/04/27 11:45:29
Playing music ..................................................................... 42
To play music CD .................................................................... 42
To play music recorded on HDD ............................................. 42
Useful functions during music play ......................................... 42
Convenient Functions ......................................................... 43
FUNCTION MENU Display ..................................................... 43
To pause the TV programme you are watching
—Pause Live TV ................................................................ 43
Linked Operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI
Control™”/Q Link)......................................................... 44
Easy control only with VIERA remote control ...................45
Information Messages ......................................................... 46
Digital Channel Information ..................................................... 46
Status Messages ..................................................................... 47
New Channel Message ............................................................ 47
Entering Text........................................................................ 47
Advanced Editing
Titles—Editing ...................................................................... 48
Other Settings
Other Settings...................................................................... 77
Child Lock ................................................................................ 77
Using the Unit’s Remote Control to Operate the TV ................ 77
Reference
Adding a VCR: Connecting to a Television and
a Video Cassette Recorder................................................. 78
Using an Audio/Video Cable (not included) ............................. 79
Using an S Video Cable (not included) .................................... 79
Using Component Video Cables (not included) ....................... 79
Using an Audio Cable (not included) for Better Sound ............ 80
Using an Optical Digital Audio Cable (not included)
for Better Sound ................................................................. 80
Connecting with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia
Interface) Terminal .............................................................. 80
Media Handling (Disc/USB Memory/SD Card) .................... 81
Inserting Discs ......................................................................... 81
Inserting/Removing the USB memory ..................................... 81
Inserting/Removing the SD Card [EX89] ................................... 81
Disc and Card Care ................................................................. 81
Frequently Asked Questions..........................................82
Setup ....................................................................................... 82
Discs ........................................................................................ 82
DVB-T ...................................................................................... 82
GUIDE Plus+ ........................................................................... 83
Recording ................................................................................ 83
USB ......................................................................................... 83
Music ....................................................................................... 83
Messages ............................................................................ 84
Creating, Editing and Playing Playlists ................................ 51
When Other Panasonic Products Respond to this Remote Control .......... 86
To Reset This Unit.................................................................... 86
General Issues: Power ............................................................ 87
General Issues: Displays ......................................................... 87
General Issues: Operation ....................................................... 88
General Issues: GUIDE Plus+ ................................................. 88
General Issues: DVB-T ............................................................ 89
General Issues: VIERA Link .................................................... 90
General Issues: USB ............................................................... 90
Playback Issues: Picture .......................................................... 90
Playback Issues: Sound .......................................................... 91
Playback Issues: Operation ..................................................... 92
Recording Issues: Recording/Timer Recording/
Copying/External input........................................................ 93
Recording Issues: Music .......................................................... 95
Editing Issues: HDD & DVD ..................................................... 95
Editing Issues: Still Pictures ..................................................... 95
Copying titles or playlists .............................................. 56
Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)]..............................................58
Copying using the copying list—Advanced Copy .............59
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL.............60
Copying Video (MPEG2) from an SD Card [EX89] ............61
Copying Video (MPEG2) from a video equipment ............61
P8 – 14
Additional Connections ........................................................ 78
Accessing the Title View .......................................................... 48
Title Operations........................................................................ 48
Chapters—Creating, Editing ................................................ 50
Accessing the Chapter View .................................................... 50
Chapter Operations ................................................................. 50
Accessing the Playlist View ..................................................... 51
Creating Playlists ..................................................................... 51
Editing Playlists/Chapters ........................................................ 51
Still Pictures and Music—Editing ........................................ 53
Accessing the Album (still picture)/Picture View ...................... 53
Album (still picture)/Picture Operations ................................... 53
Accessing the Album and Track View ...................................... 55
Album and Track Operation ..................................................... 55
Deleting still pictures and music using DELETE Navigator ..... 55
Quick Start Guide
Showing the menu screen ...................................................... 38
Playing DivX video contents ................................................... 38
Playing music files .................................................................. 39
Playing still pictures ................................................................ 40
Accessing the Setup Menu ...................................................... 70
Channel Settings ................................................................. 70
Playback/Recording Settings............................................... 72
Picture and Sound Settings ................................................. 73
Display and Connection Settings......................................... 74
System Settings................................................................... 76
Basic Operations
Playing DivX, Music files and Still Pictures (JPEG) ............ 38
Accessing the Management Menus ......................................... 68
Setup Menu ......................................................................... 70
Advanced Features
Selecting Titles to Play ............................................................ 36
Search .................................................................................... 37
Skip ......................................................................................... 37
Quick View (Play 1.3)........................................................... 37
Direct Play .............................................................................. 37
Slow-motion Play .................................................................... 37
Frame-by-Frame Viewing ....................................................... 37
Time Slip ................................................................................. 37
Manual Skip ............................................................................ 37
Create Chapters ..................................................................... 37
Setting On-Screen Display .................................................. 66
Accessing the On-Screen Display .......................................... 66
HDD, DVD and Card Management ..................................... 68
Advanced Editing
Advanced Playback ............................................................ 36
Setting Menus
On the Unit’s Display ............................................................... 84
On the TV................................................................................. 85
Troubleshooting Guide ..................................................86
Setting Menus
Using the GUIDE Plus+ list ...............................................33
View advertisement...........................................................33
Series recording ................................................................34
Selecting the programme from the desired programme
type or category ...........................................................34
Searching for the programme from
the GUIDE Plus+ list ....................................................35
Other Settings
GUIDE Plus+ system.................................................... 33
Copying using the copying list ................................................. 62
Copying new still pictures on the SD card
—Copy New Pictures [EX89] ............................................... 63
Copying still pictures on the USB memory .............................. 63
Copying music to HDD ........................................................ 64
About the Gracenote® Database .............................................. 64
Copying music from a CD ........................................................ 64
Copying music from a USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/
DVD-R DL ........................................................................... 64
To update Gracenote® Database ............................................. 65
Reference
Glossary .............................................................................. 96
Specifications ...................................................................... 98
Copying Still Pictures........................................................... 62 Index ...................................................................... Back cover
About descriptions in these operating instructions
 These operating instructions are applicable to models DMREX89 and DMR-EX79. Unless otherwise indicated, illustrations
in these operating instructions are of DMR-EX79.
[EX89] : indicates features applicable to DMR-EX89 only.
[EX79] : indicates features applicable to DMR-EX79 only.
 Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are
applicable to the DMR-EX89 model only.
 Pages to be referred to are indicated as “  ”.
5
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 5
2009/04/27 11:45:29
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care
The HDD is a high precision recording instrument and because of its long recording capability and high speed operation it is a very special
device that is easily susceptible to damage.
As a basic rule, save important content to a disc as backup.
 The HDD is a device that is not built to withstand vibration/shock or dust
Depending on the setup environment and handling of the HDD some content may become damaged and play and recording may no longer be
possible. Especially during operation, do not subject the unit to any vibration, shock, or remove the AC mains lead from the household mains
socket. In the event of a power failure during recording or play, the content may be damaged.
 The HDD is a temporary storage device
The HDD is not an everlasting storage device for recorded content. Use the HDD as a temporary storage place for one-off viewing, editing, or
copying. It is recommended to save the recorded content on a disc or to keep the original data or CDs that they were copied from.
 Immediately save (backup) all content as soon as you feel there may be a problem with the HDD
If there is an irregularity within the HDD, repetitive strange sounds or problems with picture (block noise, etc.) may result. Using the HDD in this
condition may worsen the problem and in the worst case the HDD may no longer be usable. As soon as you notice this type of problem, copy
all content to disc and request service. Recorded content (data) on a HDD that has become unusable is unrecoverable.
 When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.
 Setup precautions
 Do not place in an enclosed area where the rear cooling fan
and the cooling vents on the side are covered up.
 Place the unit on a surface that is flat and not subject to
vibration or impact.
 Do not place on anything that generates
DO NOT
heat like a video cassette recorder, etc.
 Do not place in an area often subject to
temperature changes.
This unit
 Place in an area where condensation does
VCR
not occur. Condensation is a phenomenon
where moisture forms on a cold surface
when there is an extreme change in
temperature. Condensation may cause internal damage to the unit.
 Conditions where condensation may occur
– When there is an extreme change in temperature (moving from
a very hot location to a very cold location, or vice versa, or when
subjected to an air conditioner or when cooled air directly impacts
the unit). When the HDD (warms during operation) is subjected
to cold air, condensation may form on the inside of the HDD and
may cause damage to the HDD heads, etc.
– When there is high humidity or a lot of steam in the room.
– During the rainy season.
 Cigarette smoke etc. causes malfunction or
breakdown
The unit may breakdown if cigarette smoke or bug spray/vapor, etc.
gets inside the unit.
 While operating
 Do not move the unit or subject to vibration or impact. (The HDD
may become damaged.)
 Do not remove the AC mains lead from the household mains
socket, or flip the power breaker switch.
While the unit is on, the HDD is rotating at high speed. Sound or
movement due to rotation is normal.
 When moving the unit
 Turn the unit off. (Wait until “BYE” disappears from the display.)
 Remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket.
 Move only after the unit has come to a complete stop (approx.
2 minutes) in order to avoid subjecting to vibration and shock.
(Even after turning the unit off, the HDD continues operating for a
short time.)
In the above situation, without turning the unit on, let the
unit adjust to the room temperature and wait 2–3 hours until
condensation is gone.
 HDD recording time remaining
This unit records using a VBR (Variable bit rate) data compression system to vary recorded data segments to match video data segments
which may cause differences in the displayed amount of time and space remaining for recording.
If the remaining amount of time is insufficient, delete any unwanted titles to create enough space before you start recording. (Deleting a playlist
will not increase the amount of time.)
 Indemnity concerning recorded content
Panasonic does not accept any responsibility for damages directly or indirectly due to any type of problems that result in loss of recording or
edited content (data), and does not guarantee any content if recording or editing does not work properly. Likewise, the above also applies in
a case where any type of repair is made to the unit (including any other non-HDD related component).
6
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 6
2009/04/27 11:45:29
Remote Control Information/Unit Care
Remote Control Information
About batteries
Using the remote control
 Insert so the poles ( and ) match those in the remote control.
Aim at the sensor, avoiding obstacles, up to a maximum range of
7 m directly in front of the unit.
Remote control signal sensor
R6/LR6, AA
 Use alkaline or manganese batteries.
 Do not mix old and new batteries.
 Do not use different types at the same time.
 Do not heat or expose to flame.
 Do not leave the battery(ies) in an automobile exposed to direct
sunlight for a long period of time with doors and windows closed.
 Do not take apart or short circuit.
 Do not attempt to recharge alkaline or manganese batteries.
 Do not use batteries if the covering has been peeled off.
Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage which can
damage items the fluid contacts and may cause a fire.
20
30
20
30
The distance and angles are an approximate.
Remove if the remote control is not going to be used for a long period
of time. Store in a cool, dark place.
Unit Care
The precision parts in this unit are readily affected by the
environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust.
Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.
To clean this unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.
 Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this unit.
 Before using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the instructions
that came with the cloth.
Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and
viewing pleasure.
Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, making it
impossible to record or play discs.
Use the DVD lens cleaner (not included) about once every year,
depending on frequency of use and the operating environment.
Carefully read the lens cleaner’s instructions before use.
DVD lens cleaner: RP-CL720E
Do not place the unit on
amplifiers or equipment
that may become hot.
DO NOT
The heat can damage the unit.
Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit.
Do not block the cooling fan on the rear of the unit.
Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray is empty.
Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and
the unit.
The manufacturer accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for loss of recorded or edited
material due to a problem with the unit or recordable media, and accepts no responsibility and offers no
compensation for any subsequent damage caused by such loss.
Examples of causes of such losses are
 A disc recorded and edited with this unit is played in a DVD Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another
company.
 A disc used as described above and then played again in this unit.
 A disc recorded and edited with a DVD Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another company is played in this
unit.
7
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 7
2009/04/27 11:45:29
Location of Parts/Controls
Remote Control
 Turn the unit on or off .............................................. ( 13)
 Select drive [HDD, DVD or SD ([EX89])] ............ ( 20, 21)
 Select channels and title numbers etc./
Enter numbers ......................................................... ( 13)
 To delete unwanted recorded titles,
timer programmes, still pictures or music .... ( 23, 31, 55)
 Basic operations for recording and play
 Show the digital channel information
/Programme information within GUIDE Plus+ screen
/Show status messages .............................. ( 33, 46, 47)
 Show DIRECT NAVIGATOR ............................. ( 36, 38)
 Selection/OK, Frame-by-frame.......................... ( 13, 37)
 Show OPTION menu
TV


VOL
DRIVE
SELECT
CH
AV
PAGE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
DELETE
INPUT
0 SELECT
SKIP
CH
–for playing or editing titles and still pictures, etc. (
–for showing advertisements ( 33)
–for searching for programmes ( 35)
–for showing Audio Description screen ( 46)
PROG/CHECK
MANUAL SKIP
 Use Colour buttons according to on-screen instructions.
–for switching the DIRECTNAVIGATOR screen ( 36, 40, 42)
–for switching VIDEO/Playlists ( 59)
–for GUIDE Plus+ operations ( 33)
–for deactivating timer programme ( 31)
–for showing the Series Information screen ( 34)
–for selecting programme category ( 30, 34, 46)
–for editing Favourites ( 70)
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE
STOP
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STATUS
 Recording function
OPTION
C TIO N MENU
FUN
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
GUIDE
OK
TEXT
21)
21)
28)
26)
[TEXT
[STTL
46)
46)
]: Show Digital Teletext service........................................ (
]: Show subtitles .............................................................. (
 Transmission window
 TV operations .......................................................... ( 77)
 Channel select/Change pages in the
GUIDE Plus+ list.......................................... ( 19, 21, 33)
 Show timer recording list ......................................... ( 30)
 Input select (Tuner, AV1, AV2, AV3, DV)...... ( 19, 28, 29)
 Skip approx. 1 minute forward................................. ( 37)
 Exit the menu screen
 Show the GUIDE Plus+ screen ................... ( 19, 22, 33)
 Show FUNCTION MENU ........................................ ( 43)
By using the FUNCTION MENU you may access the main
functions (Playback, Recording, etc.) quickly and easily.
 Return to previous screen
 Create chapters ....................................................... ( 37)
 Skip the specified time ............................................ ( 37)
 Show menu for disc playback etc./Change DVB
multi audio ............................................................... ( 66)
RETURN
REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
STTL
[ REC]: Start recording .................................................................(
[REC MODE]: Change recording mode .......................................... (
[EXT LINK]: Linked timer recordings with external equipment........ (
[ DIRECT TV REC]: Direct TV recording ..................................... (
 DVB function
CREATE
CHAPTER
REC
36, 41, 48, 50)
DISPLAY TIME SLIP
Main Unit


Disc tray

The unit’s display


Pull to flip down
the front panel.
[EX89]

  
Remote control signal sensor

8
 Standby/on switch (/I)....................... ( 13)
Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode
or vice versa. In standby mode, the unit is still
consuming a small amount of power.
 DV IN terminal (for a digital video
camcorder) ............................................. ( 29)
 USB port ................................................. ( 81)







AV3 input terminals ................................ ( 29)
Disc tray open/close button .................... ( 20)
Channel Select button ...................... ( 19, 21)
Start recording button ............................. ( 21)
Stop button ....................................... ( 20, 21)
Play/×1.3 button ..................................... ( 20)
[EX89] SD card slot.................................. ( 81)
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 8
2009/04/27 11:45:30

[EX89]
D COPY USB
HDD
DVD
SD



SD

EXT -L


REC
PLAY

 Timer recording indicator ........................(
 Disc indicator
This indicator lights up when a disc is inserted.
22)
On:
When a Timer recording programme is registered
Flashes:
When the unit cannot go to Timer recording standby
 Digital broadcast indicator
Lights when the unit is receiving digital broadcast.





Copying indicator
USB port indicator
[EX89] SD card slot indicator
Linked timer recordings with external equipment
indicator ..................................................( 28)
 Drive [HDD, DVD or SD ([EX89])] indicator
 Main display section
Current time/playback counter, various messages
Quick Start Guide

[EX89]
STEP 1
The Unit’s Display
 Remote control visual feedback
This flashes when it is operated by the remote control.
 Recording/Playback indicator
Rear Panel
RF
IN
DMR-EX79EB-K
VQ7AA01002 R
Y
VIDEO
PB
RF
OUT
PR
OPTICAL
R
AUDIO
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT

SER. NO.
AV1
(TV)
L
AC IN
S VIDEO
(EXT )
OUT
   
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
AV2



 Aerial input terminal...................... ( 10, 11, 78)
 Aerial output terminal ................... ( 10, 11, 78)
 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (PROGRESSIVE/
INTERLACE) terminals ............................( 79)
Y = Luminance signal (brightness), PB = Chrominance
signal (colour difference), PR = Chrominance signal (colour
difference)
 AUDIO/VIDEO output terminals .........( 79, 80)
 S VIDEO output terminal ..........................( 79)
 AV1 (TV) 21-pin Scart terminal ........ ( 10, 11, 78)




 AV2 (EXT) 21-pin Scart terminal ........ (
11, 78)
 HDMI AV OUT terminal.......................(
12, 80)
Connection of an external unit
Digital audio and video output terminal




Digital audio output terminal .....................(
Cooling fan
Serial number
AC IN~ = Power supply
80)
Connection for the AC mains lead
TV set connection
21-pin Scart terminal
The 21-pin Scart terminal transmits both input
and output signals for picture and sound.
TVs equipped with the same type of terminal
can be connected here.
This type of terminal is also called Peritel,
Euro Connector and Euro AV.
 When the unit is connected to a Q Linkcompatible TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart
cable, you can use convenient functions of
Q Link.
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19
21
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
AV1 Scart terminal (TV)
1 Audio output CH2 (R)
2 Audio input CH2 (R)
3 Audio output CH1 (L)
4 Audio ground
5 Blue ground
6 Audio input CH1 (L)
7 Blue output
8 Switching voltage output
9 Green ground
10 Q Link control signal
11 Green output
12 Reserved
13 Red ground
14 Blanking ground
15 Red output/chrominance output
16 Blanking output
17 Video output ground
18 Video input ground
19 Video output/luminance output
20 Video input
21 Ground
AV2 Scart terminal (EXT)
1 Audio output CH2 (R)
2 Audio input CH2 (R)
3 Audio output CH1 (L)
4 Audio ground
5 Blue ground
6 Audio input CH1 (L)
7 Blue input
8 Switching voltage input
9 Green ground
10 Reserved
11 Green input
12 Reserved
13 Red ground
14 Blanking ground
15 Red input/chrominance input
16 Blanking input
17 Video output ground
18 Video input ground
19 Video output
20 Video input/luminance input
21 Ground
9
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 9
2009/04/27 11:45:30
Basic Connection
Use of the RF coaxial cable
 Keep the RF coaxial cables as far away as possible from other cables.
 Do not roll up the RF coaxial cables.
 Before connection, turn off the mains for all connected equipment and read the appropriate operating
instructions.
BE SURE TO READ THE CAUTION FOR AC MAINS LEAD ON PAGE 3.
Connecting to a Television only
TV
RF IN
To the aerial
AV
HDMI IN
2
The RF coaxial cable
cannot be used for
showing pictures from
the unit. The unit must
be connected using
another method, e.g.
21-pin Scart cable
to show pictures
from the unit on the
television set.
3
1
This unit
RF IN
AV1
(TV)
RF OUT
HDMI
AV OUT
HDMI cable
You can enjoy high-quality picture
by adding the HDMI cable connection 12
 Aerial cable to the “RF IN” on the unit.
 RF coaxial cable (included) from the “RF OUT” on the unit to the “RF IN” on the TV.
 21-pin Scart cable from the “AV1 (TV)” on the unit to the “AV” on the TV.
Connecting AC mains lead (included)
Connect only after all other connections are complete.
This unit
AC IN
10
To household
mains socket
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 10
2009/04/27 11:45:30
 Before connection, turn off the mains for all connected equipment and read the appropriate operating
instructions.
BE SURE TO READ THE CAUTION FOR AC MAINS LEAD ON PAGE 3.
Adding a Digital Satellite Receiver: Connecting to a Television and a Digital Satellite
Receiver
To the aerial
Digital satellite antenna
1
Digital satellite receiver
RF IN
TV
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
DISH INPUT
RF OUT
AV/VCR
HDMI IN
2
RF IN/AERIAL
AV
6
AV/TV
Quick Start Guide
– You can use a variety of Q Link functions by connecting the unit to a Q Link compatible television ( 44).
– You can enjoy high-quality viewing by connecting the unit to an RGB compatible television.
“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu is set to “RGB 1 (without component)” or RGB 2 (without component)”
( 75)
– “AV2 Input” settings in the Setup menu ( 75)
STEP 2
Using a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable
This unit
AV
5
RF IN
The RF coaxial cable cannot be
used for showing pictures from the
unit. The unit must be connected
using another method, e.g. 21-pin
Scart cable to show pictures from
the unit on the television set.
RF OUT
AV1(TV)
4
AV2 (EXT) HDMI AV OUT
3
HDMI cable
You can enjoy high-quality picture
by adding the HDMI cable connection 12






Aerial cable to the “RF IN” on the digital satellite receiver.
RF coaxial cable from the “RF OUT” on the digital satellite receiver to the “RF IN” on the unit.
RF coaxial cable (included) from the “RF OUT” on the unit to the “RF IN/AERIAL” on the TV.
21-pin Scart cable from the “AV/VCR” on the digital satellite receiver to the “AV2 (EXT)” on the unit.
21-pin Scart cable from the “AV1 (TV)” on the unit to the “AV” on the TV.
21-pin Scart cable from the “AV/TV” on the digital satellite receiver to the “AV” on the TV.
To view digital satellite programmes
Refer to “Watching Digital Satellite Programmes” ( 19)
To record digital satellite programmes
Refer to “Recording from a Digital Satellite Receiver” ( 28)
When the unit is not to be used for a long time
To save power, unplug it from the household mains socket. This unit consumes a small amount of power,
even when it is turned off.
[approx. 0.9 W (“Power Save” is set to “On”)]
After completing the above connections, proceed to the TV Tuning (
13).
Additional Connections
12, 78
11
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 11
2009/04/27 11:45:30
Basic Connection
 You can enjoy high-quality picture by adding the HDMI cable connection to the 21-pin Scart cable connection
between this unit and your TV.
Connecting to a TV with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) Cable (not
included)
When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted,
enabling you to enjoy high quality, digital video and audio with just one cable. When connecting to an HDMIcompatible HDTV (High Definition Television), the output can be switched to 1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.
 This unit incorporates HDMITM (V.1.3a with Deep Colour) technology that can reproduce greater colour
gradation (4096 steps) when connected to a compatible TV.
A lower colour gradation (256 steps), without Deep Colour, will be reproduced if connected to a TV which does not
support Deep Colour.
The unit will automatically set appropriate output to suit the connected TV.
 Video sources converted to 19201080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective
image resolution than true, native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.
 Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).
 When setting video output to “1080p”, please use the HDMI cables 5.0 meters or less.
Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM” function
When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked
operations would be possible. [ 44, Linked Operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”/Q Link)]
 It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.
Recommended part number: RP-CDHG10 (1.0 m), RP-CDHG15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHG20 (2.0 m), RP-CDHG30
(3.0 m), RP-CDHG50 (5.0 m), etc.
 Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.
Digital Satellite receiver
TV
HDMI OUT
HDMI IN
AV/VCR
HDMI IN
This unit
AV
If the 21-pin Scart cable is connected,
the following functions are available.
 Direct TV Recording ( 26)
 Watching Digital Satellite
Programmes ( 19)
(In this case, make sure to switch
the television input to “AV”.)
AV1(TV)
AV2 (EXT)
Connecting with a Panasonic TV
(VIERA)
HDMI
AV OUT
HDMI cable
21-pin Scart cable
 Set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and Optical” ( 75).
(The default setting is “HDMI and Optical”.)
To enjoy High Quality Video up-converted to 1080p, you need to connect the unit to 1080p compatible HDTV and set “HDMI
Video Format” in the Setup menu to “1080p” ( 75).
Notes
 If connecting to equipment that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be downmixed ( 96) and output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable (some discs cannot be down-mixed).
 You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.
For display units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) that are equipped with a digital DVI input
terminal (PC monitors, etc.):
Depending on the unit, picture may not be displayed properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable (audio
cannot be output).
12
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 12
2009/04/27 11:45:30
DVB Auto Setup
Scan
CH
27
27
DVB Auto Setup starts. The unit
will search for the digital terrestrial
channels. This takes about
5 minutes.
27
27
CH 21
Channel Name
BBC ONE Wales
BBC 2W
Type
TV
TV
BBC NEWS 24
BBC Radio Wales
TV
9
Radio 9
TV: 6
Radio: 4
68
Quality
9
9
Data: 0
SKIP
Power Save
CH
PROG/CHECK
MANUAL SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.
A
3
On
Off
RETURN
Off
Approx. 15 W
Quick
Cannot do
Can do
OPTION
RETURN
CREAT
A E
CHAPTER
REC
TEXT
REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
STTL
DISPLAY TIME SLIP
Stays lighted
It is possible to startup and start recording within several seconds.
Depending on the type of TV or the connected terminal, it may take time to
display the screen.
When setup has completed, the confirmation screen appears.
OK
The Owner ID settings screen appears.
 and press the numbered buttons to enter
your choice of a 4-digit PIN number.
Owner ID
Make a note of the PIN number
(don’t forget), as it is not possible
to return to the factory preset.
OK
TION MENU
On
Approx. 0.9 W
Not quick
Turns off
(The clock display
disappeared.)
Watching the picture from the digital
satellite receiver connected to the
AV2 terminal
GUIDE
Off: With Quick Start
function and AV2 loop-through
in standby.
C
FUN
OK
EXIT
STAATUS
On: Minimise standby power
consumption, without
Quick Start function and
AV2 loop-through in standby.
“On”: It will go into the Power Save
mode when the unit is in
standby mode.
“Off”: It is possible to start quickly from the standby mode.
(Quick Start mode)
–The features of the power save function when the unit is in
standby mode are as below.
PIN number Name
House No.
Postcode
RETURN
RETURN : leave
OK
CH
RETURN
SELECT

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
DELETE
INPUT
0 SELECT
Searching...
Power Save Function:
,  to select “On” or
“Off”, then OK
Front display
VOL
AV
PAGE
TV’s remote control
to turn the unit on.
Power Save
Power consumption
Startup time

DRIVE
SELECT
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R

TV

Quick Start Guide
Preparation:
 Turn on the mains for the television
(and connected equipment) and select
the appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
 These are the first settings you make
upon buying the unit. You don’t need to
make these settings again.
STEP 3
Setting the Channels and Clock
to store the PIN number.
(continued on the next page)
Tips
To cancel Auto-Setup
Press [RETURN ].
 If the unit displays “No stations
found!”
Press [] to select “No” and press
[OK]. Go to step . After you have
performed steps –, turn off the
unit and confirm the cable or aerial
input is connected to the RF IN
terminal. Restart the Auto-Setup
again ( 71, DVB Auto Setup).
 If the clock setting menu appears or
the clock is not correct, set the clock
manually ( 14).
Restarting the Auto-Setup (
DVB Auto Setup)
71,
To correct the PIN number
1. Press [, ] to select the digit.
2. Press the numbered buttons to enter
the digit.
 When this unit is not operated for
approximately 5 minutes while the
screen is being displayed, the screen
saver may be displayed.
You can turn this function off ( 74,
Screen Saver).
13
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 13
2009/04/27 11:45:30
Setting the Channels and Clock
to select “Yes”, then
OK
The cursor moves to “Name”.
to enter the name.
Clock Setting
This unit usually obtains time and date information from
digital broadcasts and automatically corrects the time
several times a day.
However, if the clock is not set correctly, adjust the clock.
,  to select a letter, then  to
move to next character.
With the unit stopped
C
FUN
OK
TION MENU
Repeat this to enter the name.
to store the name.
 and  and then repeat steps
,  to enter and store “House
No.” and “Postcode”.
,  to select “Others”, then
RETURN
,  to select “Setup”, then
The Owner ID settings screen disappears.
– Auto-Setup for your unit is complete. You
can now choose your favourite channels
and store them in the required order in the
Favourites. ( 70)
,  to select “Others”, then 
OK
,  to select “Clock”, then
OK
OK
,  to select “Off” of
“Automatic”, then OK
Tips
To correct the character
1. Press [, ] to select the character.
2. Press [, ] to correct the character.
Clock
Automatic Off
To display the Owner ID information on TV
Press and hold [] on the main unit for more than 5 seconds.
The PIN number is not displayed.
After 30 seconds this menu automatically disappears.
Time
15 : 45 : 39
Date
1 /
8 / 2009
Number
CHANGE
SELECT
Please set clock manually.
OK: store
RETURN: leave
OK
RETURN
,  to select the item you want
to change.
The items change as follows:
HourMinuteSecondDayMonthYear
  
,  to change the setting.
You can also use the numbered buttons for
setting.
OK
to confirm new date and
time and to initiate the clock.
RETURN
Tips
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Notes
14
If a TV station transmits a time setting signal, and when “Automatic”
in the Clock setting menu is set to “On”, the automatic time correction
function checks the time and if necessary it is adjusted several times
every day.
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 14
2009/04/27 11:45:31
HDD and Disc Handling
Data that can
be recorded
and played
Rewritable
Play on
other
players1
Recording
16:9
aspect
picture2
Copy-once
recording
(CPRM) ( 24)
Hard disk
drive
(HDD)
Video
Still picture
Music

—


DVD-RAM
Video
Still picture



CPRM ( 96)
compatible discs
only.
DVD-R
Video3
or
Still picture3
—


—
[-R] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
(Video only)
DVD-R DL
Video
—


—
[-R]DL] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
DVD-RW
Video



—
[-RW‹V›] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
+R
Video
—

— (4:3
aspect)
—
[+R] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
+R DL
Video
—

— (4:3
aspect)
—
[+R]DL] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
+RW
Video


— (4:3
aspect)
—
[+RW]
Logo
Standard symbol
Quick Start Guide
Disc type
STEP 3
Usable Discs for Recording and Playback
[HDD[

[RAM]
: Can do, –: Cannot do
1
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Finalisation is needed for playback on other equipment ( 69).
[RAM] can be played back on Panasonic DVD recorders and DVDRAM compatible DVD players.
[-R]DL], [+R]DL] or [+RW] can be played back only on equipment
compatible with these discs.
2
For further information ( 24, Notes for Recording)
3
[-R] Videos and still pictures cannot be mixed on one disc.
 [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] To use a new disc, formatting is
necessary ( 68).
 [+RW] If the disc failed to play on other equipment, we recommend
you create top menu ( 69).
 Use of Panasonic discs is recommended.
For available recording times for different discs under different
recording modes, see “Recording Modes and Durations” ( 25).
 Formatting and/or recording/initializing constraints may prevent you
from playing or recording certain discs.
 Please see specifications ( 98) for compatible disc versions and
recording speeds.
Notes
 [RAM] will show an increase in available space whenever a title has
been erased.
 [-RW‹V›] and [+RW] discs will only show an increase in available space
when their last title has been erased.
 [-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] The discs will show no increase in available
space after deleting titles.
 You may not be able to record depending on the condition of the
discs and you may not be able to play them due to the condition of
the recording.
You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
When playing DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL (Double Layer, single-sided)
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL
When switching layers:
(Double Layer, single-sided) discs have two writable
Video and audio may momentarily cut
layers on one side. If there is not enough space on the
first layer to record a programme, the remainder is
recorded on the second layer. When playing a title
Second recordable layer
recorded on both layers, the unit automatically
The available
switches between layers and plays the title
(Outer
(Inner
space
in the same way as a normal programme.
section of
section of
First recordable layer
However, video and audio may momentarily
the disc)
the disc)
cut out when the unit is switching layers.
DVD-R DL
Title 1
Title 2
+R DL
Playback direction
 Recording Modes and Durations (
25)
15
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 15
2009/04/27 11:45:32
HDD and Disc Handling
Play-only Discs
Disc type
Logo
DVD-Video
DVD-RW
(DVD Video
Recording
format)
Standard
symbol
[DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›]
DVD-R
DivX, MP3,
WMA, JPEG
DVD-R DL
[CD]
CD
DivX, MP3,
WMA, JPEG
Uses
High quality movie and music discs
DVD-RW video recorded on another DVD recorder
 You can play programmes that allow “One time only recording” if
they have been recorded onto a CPRM compatible disc.
 By formatting ( 68) the disc, you can record onto it in DVD-Video
format.
 It may be necessary to finalise the disc on the equipment used for
recording.
 DVD-R and DVD-R DL with video recorded in DivX ( 18)
 DVD-R and DVD-R DL with still pictures recorded in JPEG ( 18)
 DVD-R and DVD-R DL with music recorded in MP3/WMA ( 18)
 Recorded audio and music (including CD-R/RW)
You can record tracks to this unit’s HDD.
 CD-R and CD-RW with video recorded in DivX ( 18)
 CD-R and CD-RW with still pictures recorded in JPEG ( 18)
 CD-R and CD-RW with music recorded in MP3/WMA ( 18)
You can record tracks to this unit’s HDD.
Video CD
[VCD]
 Recorded music and video (including CD-R/RW)
SVCD

Play may be impossible on some DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format), DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R or CD-RW discs due to the condition of
the recording.
 You can play still pictures (JPEG), MP3 and WMA format data recorded on DVD-R, DVD-R DL or CD-R/RW. You can also play CD-DA, Video
CD and SVCD (conforming to IEC62107) format data recorded on CD-R/RW. Close the session or finalise the disc after recording.
 The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
Discs that Cannot be Played
 2.6/5.2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm
 3.95/4.7 GB DVD-R for Authoring
 DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL recorded on
another unit and not finalised ( 96).
 Discs recorded with AVCHD format
 DVD-Video with a region number other than “2” or
“ALL”
 DVD-Audio
 Blu-ray, HD DVD
 DVD-ROM, +R 8 cm, CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G,
Photo CD, CVD, SACD, MV-Disc, PD
Types of disc or title recorded on HDD for
the type of connected TV
When you use the discs recorded either PAL or NTSC, or playback a
title recorded on HDD using PAL or NTSC, refer to this table.
(: Possible to view, —: Impossible to view)
TV type
Disc/Titles
recorded on
HDD
Yes/No
PAL

NTSC

PAL

NTSC
1 (PAL60)
PAL
—
NTSC
2
Multi-system TV
PAL TV
NTSC TV
1
If your television is not equipped to handle PAL 525/60 signals the
picture will not be shown correctly.
2
Select “NTSC” in “TV System” ( 75).
 When playing back a disc or title recorded on the HDD, ensure that
you match the “TV System” setting to the disc or title (PAL or NTSC)
( 75).
16
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 16
2009/04/27 11:45:32
USB Memory and Card Handling
Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are applicable to the DMR-EX89 model only.
USB memories you can use on this unit
Compatible USB memories
USB memories which are defined as USB mass storage class, and digital cameras that use PTP protocol:
– USB memories that support USB 1.0/1.1 and USB 2.0 Full Speed/High Speed.
USB memories of up to 128 GB can be used.
USB memories that support bulk only transfer.
CBI (Control/Bulk/Interrupt) is not supported.
Digital Cameras which require additional programme installation when connected to a PC are not supported.
MTP (Media Transport Protocol) device is not supported.
A multi-port USB card reader is not supported.
FAT16 and FAT32 file systems are supported.
UDF/NTFS/exFAT file system is not supported.
Depending on the sector size, some files may not work.
Only the first partition on USB memories with multi-partition is supported.
Format
Standard symbol
[USB]
(: Possible, : Impossible)
Data that can be recorded and played
File format
DivX
MP3/WMA
Still pictures (JPEG)
Playing



Copying to HDD



You can play MP3/WMA files
recorded with a computer onto
the USB memory and copy them
to HDD ( 39, 64).
You can play still pictures
recorded with a computer onto
the USB memory and copy them
to HDD, DVD-RAM or card
( 40, 63).
Instructions
You can play DivX files recorded
with a computer onto the USB
memory ( 38).
Despite meeting the conditions mentioned above, there may be USB memories that cannot be used for this unit.
This unit’s USB port does not support bus-powered USB device.
If a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD etc. is connected to this unit’s USB port, you can copy the SD Video recorded with the camera to
this unit’s HDD or DVD-RAM.
Cards Usable on this Unit [EX89]
Type
Standard symbol
Data that can be
recorded and played
Instructions
SD Memory Card1 (from 8 MB to 2 GB)
SDHC Memory Card2 (from 4 GB to 32 GB)
MultiMediaCard
1
Including miniSD and microSD Card
2
Including miniSDHC Card and microSDHC Card
The card types mentioned above will be referred to as “SD card” in these operating instructions.
[SD]
Still pictures
Video (SD Video)
You can insert directly into the SD card slot.
1
A miniSD Card and a microSD Card must be used with the adaptor that comes with the card.
2
A miniSDHC Card and microSDHC Card must be used with the adaptor that comes with the card.
 You can play and copy still pictures taken on a digital camera, etc. ( 40, 63)
 SD Video shot with a Panasonic SD Video camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD or DVD-RAM (
 SD Video cannot be played directly from the SD card.
61).
Suitable SD cards
 When using SD cards 4 GB or larger, only SD cards that display the SDHC Structure of folders
Card
: Numbers
logo can be used.
DCIM
XXX: Letters
 Usable memory is slightly less than the card capacity.
XXXXX
 Please confirm the latest information on the following website.
(Picture folder)
http://panasonic.co.jp/pavc/global/cs (This site is in English only.)
XXXX.JPG
 If the SD card is formatted on other equipment, the time necessary for
recording may be longer. Also, if the SD card is formatted on a PC, you
may not be able to use it on this unit. In these cases, format the card on
001
this unit ( 68, 96).
Any folder with JPEG files
 This unit is compatible with SD Memory Cards that meet SD Card
P0000001.JPG
Specifications FAT12 and FAT16 formats, as well as SDHC Memory Cards
P0000002.JPG
in FAT32 format.
SD_VIDEO
 SDHC Memory Cards used for recording with this unit can only be used with
PRG
other SDHC Memory Card-compatible equipment. SDHC Memory Cards
(MPEG2 folder)
MOV.MOD
cannot be used with equipment that is only compatible with SD Memory Cards.
MOV.MOI
PRG.PGI
 This unit cannot play AVCHD format motion pictures on an SD card.
 We recommend using a Panasonic SD card.
MGR_INFO
(MPEG2 information folder)
 Keep the Memory Card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
17
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 17
2009/04/27 11:45:33
DivX files, Music files and Still Pictures (JPEG)
Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive
are applicable to the DMR-EX89 model only.
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
File format
DivX
 Files must have the extension
“.DIVX”, “.divx”, “.AVI” or “.avi”.
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
 Compatible formats: DCFcompliant (Content recorded on a
digital camera, etc.)

Design rule for Camera File system: unified standard
established by Japan Electronics and Information Technology
Industries Association (JEITA)
DivX File information
Playable media
Notes
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
Number of folders Maximum number of folders recognizable: 300
folders (including the root folder)
Number of files
Maximum number of files recognizable1 : 200 files
Support version
Certified to the DivX Home Theater Profile.
Video
– Number of stream: Up to 1
– Codec: DIV3, DIV4, DIVX, DV50
– Picture size: 32 x 32 to 720 x 576
– FPS (Frame Per Second): Up to 30 fps
Audio
– Number of stream: Up to 8
– Format: MP3, MPEG, Dolby Digital
– Multi channel: Dolby Digital is possible. MPEG
multi is 2 ch conversion.
MP3/WMA File Information
Playable media
[HDD] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
File format
MP3
 Files must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.
WMA (Windows Media-formatted file)
 Files must have the extension “.wma” or “.WMA”.
Number of folders Maximum number of folders (groups or albums)
(groups or albums) recognizable:
300 folders (groups or albums) (including the root
folder)
Number of files
(tracks)
Maximum number of files (tracks) recognizable :
3000 files (tracks)
Bit rates (MP3)
32 kbps to 320 kbps
Sampling
frequency (MP3)
16 kHz/22.05 kHz/24 kHz/32 kHz/44.1 kHz/
48 kHz
ID3 tags
WMA tags
compatible ([HDD] [USB])
For WMA
This unit is compatible with Windows Media
Audio 9 (WMA9).
1
Still Picture (JPEG2) Information
Playable media
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] [SD]
File format
JPEG
 Files must have the extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”.
Number of pixels
Between 3434 and 61444096
(Sub sampling is 4:2:2 or 4:2:0)
Number of
folders3
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Maximum number of folders
recognizable: 300 folders
[HDD] [RAM] [SD] This unit can handle a maximum
of 300 folders
Number of files3
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Maximum number of files
recognizable1: 3000 files
[HDD] [RAM] [SD] This unit can handle a maximum
of 3000 files
MOTION JPEG
PROGRESSIVE JPEG
Not supported
 If there is a large amount of still picture data etc. within an MP3/
WMA file, play may not be possible.
1
Total number of recognizable file including MP3, WMA, JPEG,
DivX and other type of files is 4000.
2
It may take a few moments for still pictures to display.
18 3 When there are many files and/or folders, some files may not
display or be playable.
 Compatible formats: ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended
formats) and Joliet
 This unit is compatible with multi-session/border (except for
DVD-R DL); however, reading or play of the disc may take time if
there are a lot of sessions.
 Operation may take time to complete when there are many files
(tracks) and/or folders (groups or albums); some files (tracks) may
not display or be playable.
 Images recorded at a very high resolution may take a long time to
display.
 English alphabetical characters and Arabic numerals are
displayed correctly. Other characters may not display correctly.
 The display order on this unit may differ from how the order is
displayed on a computer.
 Depending on how you create the disc (writing software), files
(tracks) and folders (groups or albums) may not play in the order
you number them.
 This unit is not compatible with packet-write format.
 Depending on the recording conditions, the disc may not be
played.
 This unit is not compatible with copy-protected, Lossless,
Professional, Voice and Multiple Bit Rate (MBR) for WMA.
 This unit is not compatible with WMA files protected with digital
rights management (DRM).
Tips
You can play music files (MP3/WMA) and still pictures (JPEG) on
this unit by making folders as shown below. However depending
on the method of writing data (writing software), play may not be in
the order you number the folders.
Structure of MP3/WMA folders
e.g. Structure of MP3 folders
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
Prefix with 3-digit numbers in the
order you want to play them.
 The file name extension of
WMA files will be “.wma”.
Root
001
001
001.mp3
002.mp3
003.mp3
002
001.mp3
002.mp3
003.mp3
004.mp3
003
Order of play
001.mp3
002.mp3
003.mp3
Structure of still pictures (folders)
Root
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
Files inside a folder are displayed
in the order they were updated or
taken.
P0000001.jpg
P0000002.jpg
001 002 Folder
P0000003.jpg
P0000004.jpg
P0000005.jpg
003 Folder
004 Folder
Order of play
P0000006.jpg
P0000007.jpg
P0000008.jpg
P0000009.jpg
P0000010.jpg
P0000011.jpg
P0000012.jpg
[RAM]
The following
can be displayed on this unit.
: Numbers XXX: Letters
Root
1
Still pictures on the root folder
XXXX.JPG
can also be displayed.
JPEG
2
Folders can be created on other
DCIM
equipment. However, these
XXXXX
folders cannot be selected as a
copying destination.
XXXX.JPG
 If a folder name or file name
has been input using other
equipment, the name may not be
DCIM
displayed properly or you may
XXXXX
not be able to play or edit the
data.
XXXX.JPG
1
2
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 18
2009/04/27 11:45:33
Watching Television
Refer to “GUIDE Plus+ system” (
33) for detail information.
This DVD recorder has a tuner which allows it to directly receive and record
digital terrestrial channels.
Preparation:
 Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the
connections to this unit.
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
DELETE
INPUT
0 SELECT
TV Guide: Landscape
All Types
Tue 18th
Tue 18/08/09
19:45
VOL
CH
AV
PAGE
to turn the unit on.
GUIDE

DRIVE
SELECT
Important:
This unit does not have an analogue broadcast tuner.

TV

All Channels
Emmerdale : In today’s show we will...
Time:
SKIP
BBC 1
CH
PROG/CHECK
MANUAL SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
BBC 2
– The GUIDE Plus+ list appears.
Channel 4
Channel 5
2
SELECT
RETURN
,  to select the current programme, then
Page
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.
A
3
Page
OK
EXIT
STAATUS
GUIDE
OK
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
OK
OPTION
TION MENU
Selecting a Channel without the GUIDE Plus+ system
To select desired channel
Press [,  CH].
C
FUN
, to select “View”, then
STOP
Category
Prog. Type
OPTION: Select Advert, etc.
info
Guide Change Display Mode
Basic Operations
+24 hours
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
To directly enter Channels
You can also select channels with the numbered buttons.
e. g., “5”:
[0] [0] [5] or [5] [OK]
“15”:
[0] [1] [5] or [1] [5] [OK]
REC
TEXT
REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
STTL
DISPLAY TIME SLIP
Tips
 Regarding Digital Channel Information ( 46)
 If New Channel Message appears ( 47)
 To select Audio Description, Digital Teletext and subtitles (
 To change DVB Multi Audio ( 67, DVB Multi Audio)
46)
Notes
 The GUIDE Plus+ list is not displayed immediately after initial tuning is done.
Watching Digital Satellite Programmes
You can view the digital satellite programmes via this unit by the following
method when “Power Save” is set to “On”, and the digital satellite receiver is
not connected to TV.
Preparation:
 Connect a digital satellite receiver to this unit’s AV2 input terminals
( 11).
 Turn on the digital satellite receiver.
 Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the
connections to this unit.
Tips
 When “Power Save” is set to “Off”
( 76), you can watch the digital
satellite programme without turning
the unit on.
Notes

INPUT
SELECT
to turn the unit on.
to select the “AV2”.
 You cannot watch digital satellite
programmes during timer recording.
19
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 19
2009/04/27 11:45:33
Playback
Refer to “Advanced Playback” (
36–37) for detail information.
Preparation:
 Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the
connections to this unit.
Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs
VOL
CH
AV
PAGE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
DELETE
INPUT
0 SELECT
to turn the unit on.
DRIVE
SELECT

DRIVE
SELECT
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
[VCD] [CD]

TV

to select the HDD or DVD drive.
SKIP
CH
PROG/CHECK
MANUAL SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
If you selected the DVD drive
to open the tray (Button located on front of the unit).
OPEN/CLOSE
– Insert a disc (
the tray.
81) and press [ OPEN/CLOSE] again to close
STOP
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STAATUS
GUIDE
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
Stopping Play
Pausing Play
Press [].
– The stopped position is
memorized.
(Resume play function)
– The stopped position is cleared
when you press [] several
times.
Press [].
– Press again to restart play.
OK
OPTION
CTION MENU
F UN
PLAY/x1.3
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
REC
REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
Tips
To return to the menu screen
[DVD-V]
1. Press [OPTION].
2. Press [, ] to select “Top Menu” or
“Menu” and press [OK].
Menu Screens on the TV
[VCD]
Press [RETURN ].
[DVD-V] [VCD]
DINOSAUR
Generally, menu screens that appear on the TV may be navigated as
follows: e. g.,
DVDTOP MENU
Play
Chapter List
Subtitles
Trailer
[DVD-V]
, , , to select an item, then
OK
You can sometimes use the numbered buttons to select an item.
[VCD]
Press the numbered buttons to select an item.
e. g., “5”:
“15”:
0
20
PAUSE
5
1
5
Notes
 [HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Playback starts from the most recent
recording.
 [DVD-V] [VCD]
Playback starts from the point
specified by the disc.
 [CD]
Playback starts from the beginning of
the disc.
 Depending on the disc type, playing
may automatically start without
pressing [] (PLAY).
 The unit takes some time to read the
disc before play starts.
 DISCS CONTINUE TO ROTATE
WHILE MENUS ARE DISPLAYED.
Press [] when you finish to preserve
the unit’s motor and your television
screen.
 If “” appears on the TV, the
operation is prohibited by the unit or
disc.
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 20
2009/04/27 11:45:33
Recording Television Programmes
Refer to “Notes for Recording” ( 24) and “Advanced Recording” (
for detail information on recording.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
25–27)
Preparation:
 Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the
connections to this unit.
 [RAM] If the disc is protected, release protection ( 68).
TV


VOL
DRIVE
SELECT
CH
AV
PAGE
to select the HDD or DVD drive.
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW] If you selected the DVD drive
OPEN/CLOSE
PAGE
to select desired channel.
HDD
Recording Mode
Rec Mode
Remain
XP
47:47
SP
95:34
LP
191:11
EP
381:16
CH
PROG/CHECK
MANUAL SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.
A
3
EXIT
STAATUS
GUIDE
OK
OPTION
CTION MENU
F UN
REC
to select the recording
mode. ( 25)
STOP
D
– To select with the numbered buttons ( 19).
– When no channel setting is performed on the unit and
broadcast is recorded directly from the digital satellite receiver,
select a channel on the connected equipment, then press
[INPUT SELECT] to select “AV2”.
REC MODE
SKIP
to open the tray (Button located on front of the unit).
– Insert a disc with enough remaining blank space and press
[ OPEN/CLOSE] again to close the tray.
– When the format confirmation screen is displayed ( 26).
CH
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
DELETE
0 SELECT
Basic Operations
DRIVE
SELECT
to turn the unit on.
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R

RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
REC
TEXT
REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
STTL
DISPLAY TIME SLIP
SELECT
to start recording.
HDD
REC
Elapsed recording time
Pausing Recording
Press [].
– Press again to restart recording.
(The title is not divided.)
Stopping Recording
Press [].
Tips
 If a programme to record has subtitle, Audio Description or multiple audio, you can record with
them. They cannot be switched after recording.
– To record with subtitle
Before start recording, show the subtitle ( 46). If the programme has multiple subtitle,
select the desired language ( 71).
– To record with Audio Description
Before start recording, turn on the Audio Description and set the volume ( 46).
– To record with the selected audio
Before start recording, select the desired audio channel or language, if the programme has
multiple audio channel or language ( 67, 71).
 To record sound using LPCM (XP mode only):
Set the “Audio Mode for XP Recording” to “LPCM” in the Setup menu ( 73).
Notes
 [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW] To use a new
disc, formatting is necessary.
 [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW] It takes about
30 seconds for the unit to complete
recording management information
after recording finishes.
 You cannot change the channel or
recording mode during recording.
 This unit cannot record NTSC signals
to discs that already have PAL signal
recordings. (However, both types of
programmes can be recorded onto
the HDD.)
 [-R] Video cannot be recorded to
DVD-R discs with JPEG images
already recorded on them.
 Depending on the type of disc used
for recording or the type of broadcast,
there may be restrictions on the title
you are trying to record. ( 24)
21
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 21
2009/04/27 11:45:34
Timer Recording
What is FREEVIEW+TM?
FREEVIEW+ is the functions that enable timer recordings to be controlled by the signal
sent from the broadcaster. “Guide Link”, “Series recording” ( 34), and “Split Programme”
are available.
“Guide Link” — If you set a timer recording from the TV Guide, the recording’s start and
stop times can be controlled by the broadcaster, e.g. delayed start.
This is indicated by “Guide Link” in the Timer Recording screen in step  ( below).

DRIVE
SELECT
“Split Programme” — If a programme is separated into 2 or more parts by some other
programmes e.g. news, this unit pauses recording during the gap.
This is indicated by “Split” in the Timer Recording screen in step  ( below).
When setting timer from the 1st split programme, other parts of the programme will be
automatically set and indicated by the timer mark on the TV Guide, but not shown on the
timer recording list.
SKIP
STOP
All Channels
HDD
DVD 1:58 SP
30:24 SP
Selection screen
Channel
TUE 18/08/09 19:45:00
Date
Start
Stop HDD Mode STTL AD
View
DVD
22:30
SingleHDD
Timer Rec SP OFF OFF
Series Timer Rec
Delete
Programme Name
Press OK to store the programme.
2
+24 hours
Remain
The West Tonight
2 BBC 2 18/ 8 TUE 20:30
3 TV
All &Channels
News
Factual : BBC 2
Holiday Programme
TUE
14.10.08
(Guide
Link)
18:00࡯18:30
Channel 4
Channel 5
RETURN
Timer
Recording
TUE 14.10.08 12:54:00
Holiday Programme
Time:
BBC 1
BBC 2
Prog. Type
OPTION: Select Advert, etc.
info
Guide Change Display Mode
Category
Series Info
OK
OK
Page
Page
 DELETE
0
--
9
Number
RETURN
RETURN
“Guide Link”, “Split” and “Series” are displayed here.
– If “Selection Screen” appears, press [, ] to select “Single Timer Rec.”, then press [OK].
Refer to “Series recording” ( 34) for “Series Timer Rec.”.
Confirm the programme (start and end time) by
TV magazine, etc. and correct if necessary
using
y
, , , , then OK
Timer icon
–
–
–
–
–
22
MANUAL SKIP
PLAY/x1.
A
3
EXIT
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
GUIDE
OK
TION MENU
All Types
2 BBC 2
PROG/CHECK
C
FUN
OK
Tue 18th
CH
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
,  ,  to select the future programme, then
TIMER REC
PAUSE
STAATUS
– The GUIDE Plus+ list appears.
TV Guide: Landscape
CH
SLOW/SEARCH
OPTION
GUIDE
-24 hours
VOL
AV
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
DELETE
INPUT
0 SELECT
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
Tue 18/08/09
19:45

PAGE
If you set a timer recording from the TV Guide, the recording’s start and stop times
are controlled by the signal sent from the broadcaster. If the signal is not sent
correctly, the recording may lack the beginning or the ending part of the programmes.
In order to make the timer recording work successfully, we recommend you set the
start time earlier and the end time later by some minutes, up to a maximum of 10
minutes for Guide Link to function.
e.g. When you set the timer recording for a programme that will start at 10:00 and
end at 11:00, set “9:58” and “11:05” in step  ( below).
Preparation:
 Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the
connections to this unit.
 Turn on this unit.
 If recording to DVD, insert a disc that you use for recording ( 15).
 Confirm that the clock on the unit’s display is set to the correct time.
TV
The settings are stored and the timer programme is on.
The timer icon is displayed.
“” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording standby has been activated.
Repeat steps – to programme other recordings.
Press [] to turn the unit off.
“Guide Link” will not be displayed and will not function under the following conditions.
– Timer programmes set manually ( 30).
– Timer programmes set from the TV Guide are modified or start/stop time changed by
more than 10 minutes from original time.
(Series): Series recording ( 34) is set.
(Split): The programme is split in two or more parts by other programmes. This unit
pauses recording during the gap between the parts of the programme.
Tips
 To check programmes ( 31)
 To cancel a timer recording
programming
1. Press [, , , ] to select
the programme (the timer icon is
displayed) and press [OK].
2. While “Delete” is selected, press
[OK].
3. Press [, ] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
– The timer icon disappears.
Notes
 [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW] To use a new
disc, formatting is necessary.
 The GUIDE Plus+ list is not displayed
immediately after initial tuning is
done.
 The GUIDE Plus+ system will not
work if the clock is not set correctly.
 If “NTSC” has been selected for “TV
System” ( 75), the GUIDE Plus+
system cannot be used.
 “FR” recording mode is not available
when the timer programme is controlled
by “Guide Link”.
 The receipt of the TV Guide system
data is only possible via the aerial
input of this unit. The receipt of the TV
Guide data via externally connected
satellite receivers is not possible.
 If you set a timer recording that will
overlap with other timer recordings,
the “Overlapped Timer Recording”
screen appears to help you resolve
the overlapping.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 22
2009/04/27 11:45:34
Deleting Titles
Preparation:
 Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the
connections to this unit.
 [RAM] If the disc is protected, release protection ( 68).
 Press [ OPEN/CLOSE] and insert a disc. Press [ OPEN/CLOSE]
again to close the tray.
Important:
Once deleted, contents cannot be recovered.

VOL
DRIVE
SELECT
CH
AV
PAGE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
DELETE
INPUT
0 SELECT
DELETE Navigator
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
to select the HDD or DVD drive.
SKIP
CH
PROG/CHECK
MANUAL SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
FUNCTION MENU
With the unit stopped
Remain 30:00 SP
HDD
Playback
Video
Picture
Music
C
FUN
Recording
Delete
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.
A
3
TION MENU
Basic Operations
DRIVE
SELECT
TV

Copy
TV Guide
Others
Drive Select
EXIT
STAATUS
OK
RETURN
Remain
Playback
Recording
Delete
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
OK
OPTION
FUNCTION MENU
HDD
OK
30:00 SP
DELETE Navigator
HDD
Video
Picture
Music
10/10
Chantal Show
Grouped Titles
11/10
Dolphins
VIDEO
PICTURE
TION MENU
,  to select “Video”, then
OK
C
FUN
,  to select “Delete”, then
GUIDE
RETURN
MUSIC
CREATE
CHAPTER
2
Copy
TV Guide
Others
Drive Select
REC
OK
Previous
REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
Next
Page 02/02
RETURN
OK
RETURN
OPTION
Select
Previous
, , ,  to select the title, then
Next
PAUSE
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items.
 Press [] again to cancel.
OK
Notes
 You cannot delete while recording or
copying.
 [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Even if you have
set protection on other equipment,
such titles are deleted.
Tips
 to select “Delete”, then
OK
Tips
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To view other pages
Press [, , , ] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press [OK].
 You can also press [, ] to view other pages.
Deleting Titles During Playback
 [HDD] [RAM] Deleting an item
increases the available disc space
by the amount of space taken by the
item deleted.
 [-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] Available
disc space does not increase after
deletion.
 [-RW‹V›] [+RW] Available disc space
increases when you delete the last
title.
 [HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] To recover
total disc space, the disc needs to be
formatted. ( 68)
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
During playback
DELETE
  to select “Delete”, then
OK
23
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 23
2009/04/27 11:45:34
Notes for Recording
Selecting
audio for
recording
About the
aspect
when
recording a
programme
When you
want to
copy titles in
high speed
mode from
the HDD to
DVD-R, etc.
Broadcast in multi-channel sound:
You can select audio language when received audio in
multi-channel broadcast (“Multi Audio” appears at the
bottom of digital channel information display).
However, audio cannot be switched after recording.
[HDD] [RAM] (When “Recording Format” is set to “Video
format”)
[-R] [-RW‹V›]
The original aspect used for the source programme will
also be used with the recording.
However, in the following case, programme will be
recorded in 4:3.
 [-R] [-RW‹V›] Programme recorded using “EP” or “FR
(recordings 5 hours or longer)” recording modes will be
recorded in 4:3 aspect.
Hello
Hola
Hallo
Select the audio that you want to
record in “DVB Multi Audio” in the
on-screen display ( 67).
.
[HDD] [RAM] (When “Recording Format” is set to “VR
format”)
The programme will be recorded in the original aspect.
[+R] [+RW]
The programme will be recorded in 4:3 aspect.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Set “Recording Format” to “Video format” before recording to the HDD.
(The default setting is “Video format”.
72)
You can copy titles in high speed mode (max. speed is 75X); however, the audio and aspect settings
( above) are necessary before recording to the HDD.
 Depending on the disc, max. speed may vary.
High speed copy to DVD-R, etc.
Record to HDD
HDD
In the following cases, high speed mode does not work.
 [+R] [+R\DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode
 [+R] [+R\DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect
 [-R] [-R\DL] [-RW‹V›] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode
Copy-once
recording
It is not possible to record the broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” onto DVD-R, DVD-RW,
+R, +RW or 8 cm DVD-RAM discs. Use the HDD or CPRM ( 96) compatible DVD-RAM.
[RAM] CPRM compatible discs only
12 cm
[HDD]
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]

–—
(: Can do, : Cannot do)
 “One time only recording” titles can only be transferred from the HDD to CPRM compatible DVD-RAM (They are
deleted from the HDD). They cannot be copied.
 Even when copying to videotape the title may not be copied correctly because of the copy guard.
 You cannot copy a playlist created from “One time only recording” titles.
Playing
the disc on
other DVD
players
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
The disc must be finalised after recording or copying ( 69).
It is necessary to finalise DVD-R, etc. on this unit after recording or copying titles to them. You can then play them
in the same way as a commercially sold DVD-Video. However, the discs become play-only and you can no longer
record or copy.

You can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW.
Record to DVD-R, etc.
Play on other DVD equipment
CHG
/I

DOUBLE RE-MASTER CD SEQUENTIAL
DISC
1
2
3
4
5



/
/
DISC EXCHANGE
DISC SKIP
OPEN/CLOSE
SEARCH
ENTER
L
VO
AY
TOP
U
MEN
DISPL
RETURN
MENU
Finalise
ON
OFF
DC
IN
9V
OPEN
ROUN
D
A.SUR
TOR
MONI
MOD
AT
E
REPE
MODE
PICTURE
[+RW]
If the disc failed to play on other equipment, we recommend you create top menu (
Recording to
DVD-R DL
and +R DL
24
69).
You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
 It is not possible to record to both HDD (Hard Disk Drive) and DVD drive simultaneously.
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 24
2009/04/27 11:45:35
Advanced Recording
Recording Modes and Durations
Depending on the content being recorded, the recording times may become shorter than indicated.
(The times provided on this table are an estimate.)
HDD
DVD-RAM
Single-sided Double-sided1
(4.7 GB)
(9.4 GB)
DVD-R,
DVD-RW,
+R, +RW
(4.7 GB)
DVD-R DL3,
(8.5 GB)
+R DL3
(8.5 GB)
[EX89]
(400 GB)
[EX79]
(250 GB)
XP
(High quality)
89 hours
55 hours
1 hour
2 hours
1 hour
1 hour
45 minutes
1 hour
45 minutes
SP
(Standard
play)
178 hours
110 hours
2 hours
4 hours
2 hours
3 hours
35 minutes
3 hours
35 minutes
LP
(Long play)
357 hours
221 hours
4 hours
8 hours
4 hours
7 hours
10 minutes
7 hours
10 minutes
EP
(Extra long
play)4
FR
(Flexible
Recording)4
712 hours
441 hours
8 (62) hours
(534 hours2) (331 hours2)
712 hours
maximum
441 hours
maximum
8 hours
maximum
1
Picture quality
It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side of a
double sided disc to the other.
2
When “Recording time in EP mode” has been set to “EP (6Hours)”
in the Setup menu ( 72).
The sound quality is better when using “EP (6Hours)” than when
using “EP (8Hours)”.
3
You cannot record directly to DVD-R DL and +R DL discs with this
unit. The table shows the recording time when copying.
[+R]DL] You cannot copy in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or
longer)” mode.
4
When recording to the HDD in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or
longer)” mode, you cannot perform high-speed copy to +R, +R DL
or +RW discs.
XP
SP
LP
14 hours
20
minutes
8 (62) hours
(10 hours
45 minutes2)
16
(122) hours
8 hours
maximum for
one side
8 hours
maximum
Tips
 Maximum number of titles to a disc
[HDD] 499 titles on HDD
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] 99 titles on a disc
[+R] [+RW] 49 titles on a disc
 FR (Flexible recording mode)
Using “Flexible Recording” is convenient in these kinds of situations:
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
− When the amount of free space on the disc makes selecting an
appropriate recording mode difficult
− When you want to record a long programme with the best picture
quality possible
[HDD]
− When you want to record a title to HDD so that it can then be
copied to fit one 4.7 GB disc perfectly
You do not need to edit the recorded title, or change the recording
mode when copying, to fit the disc space
e.g., Recording a 90-minute programme to 4.7 GB DVD-RAM disc:
− If you select XP mode, the programme will not fit on one disc.
A second disc is necessary for
30 minutes of the programme.
EP (6Hours)2
EP (8Hours)
Recording time
Approximately
9 hours with
14 hours
video quality
20 minutes
equivalent to
LP mode.
Advanced Features
Recording
Mode
4.7 GB
DVD-RAM
4.7 GB
DVD-RAM
− If you select SP mode, the programme will fit on one disc.
Notes
 This unit uses variable bit rate (VBR) recording which varies
the amount of data recorded to suit the picture quality, so actual
recording times and remaining recording times shown by the unit
will be different. ([-R]DL] [+R]DL] The difference will be especially
noticeable.)
Use a disc enough remaining blank space.
 When recording to DVD-RAM using EP (8Hours) mode, play may not
be possible on DVD players, even if they are compatible with DVDRAM. In this case use EP (6Hours) mode.
4.7 GB
DVD-RAM
However there will be 30 minutes
remaining disc space.
− If you select “Flexible Recording” the programme will fit on
one disc perfectly.
4.7 GB
DVD-RAM
You can set FR mode when programming timer recordings and
flexible recording ( 27).
25
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 25
2009/04/27 11:45:35
Advanced Recording
When the format confirmation screen is
displayed
Formatting is the process of making media such as
DVD-RAM recordable on recording equipment.
Important:
Formatting permanently deletes all disc contents
(including the contents that have been recorded on a
PC), regardless of protection status of disc.
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R[DL] [+RW]
The following screen may
appear when inserting a
new disc or a disc that has
been recorded on another
equipment.
Only format the disc if you
intend to use it for recording.
SELECT
OK
RETURN
Do not format if you intend to view pre-recorded titles
or contents from the disc.
 to select “Yes”, then
OK
Tips
Refer to “Formatting Discs or Cards” (
68) for more detail of formatting.
When removing a Recorded or Copied Disc
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
After recording or copying, if
you press [ OPEN/CLOSE]
to eject the disc, the following
screen may appear.
Finalise
Finalise the disc so that it can be played
on other DVD players.
Note : Recording or Editing is not possible
after finalising. This may take up to min.
Press the REC button to start finalise.
or
to start finalising.
OPEN/CLOSE
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
This function allows specifying the length of recording
time up to 4 hours.
During recording
On the main unit only
repeatedly until the desired
time is reached.
− The recording time and the unit’s display changes
as follows:
Counter (Cancel)  OFF 0:30  OFF 1:00


OFF 4:00
OFF 1:30
 OFF 3:00  OFF 2:00 
Notes
 This function does not work during timer recording or Flexible
Recording.
 Recording stops and the set time is cleared if you press [].
 The unit turns off automatically after recording finished.
Direct TV Recording
[HDD]
This function allows you to immediately start recording
the programme that you are viewing on the TV without
having to change the channels on this unit.
You can use the function when you connect the unit to a
Q Link compatible TV using a 21-pin Scart cable.
You can also use this function using VIERA Link. ( 44)
Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to exit.
This disc cannot be played on other
DVD players without finalising.
Finalising
DVD-R, etc. recorded or copied on this unit cannot be
played on other players immediately after recording or
copying. Using the Finalise feature allows you to play
these discs on other players.
Once the disc is finalised you will no longer be able to
record onto the disc.
[However if you format the DVD-RW, you can record and
copy onto the disc again. ( 68)]
REC
Specifying the Recording Time
to eject the disc without
finalising.
DIRECT TV REC
Press and hold for about
1 second.
– The titles are recorded to the HDD.
Tips
To stop recording
Press [].
Notes
 When the Digital Teletext ( 46) is displayed, intended image may
not be recorded.
 If you switch TV channels while using Direct TV recording, the Direct
TV recording stops.
 When “EXT-L” lights on the unit’s display ( 28), Direct TV recording
is unavailable.
Notes
 You cannot stop finalising once you have started it.
Tips
 If you want to provide the disc with a name or set play menu select,
select “Disc Name” ( 68), “Auto-Play Select” ( 69) or “Top Menu”
( 69) in “DVD Management” before finalising.
 Refer to “Finalising” ( 69) for more detail of finalising.
26
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 26
2009/04/27 11:45:35
Flexible Recording
Playing while you are recording
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
The unit sets the best possible picture quality that fits the
programme within the remaining disc space.
The recording mode becomes FR mode. Refer to “FR
(Flexible recording mode)” ( 25).
Chasing Playback
Preparation:
 Select the channel or the external input to record.
 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD
drive.
[HDD] [RAM]
Allows playback from the beginning of the title you are
recording.
During recording
PLAY/x1.3
With the unit stopped
Tips
C
FUN
To stop play
Press [] once.
TION MENU
To stop recording
2 seconds after play stops, press [].
,  to select “Others”, then
To stop timer recording
2 seconds after play stops,
1. Press [].
2. Press [, ] to select “Stop Recording”, then press [OK].
Simultaneous Record and Playback
,  to select
“Flexible Rec”,
then OK
Flexible Rec
Record in FR mode.
Maximum rec. time
Set rec. time
Start
8 Hour 00 Min.
8 Hour 00 Min.
Cancel
SELECT
RETURN
[HDD] [RAM]
Allows playback of a previous title, while recording
something else.
 You can also change the drive and play while
recording. Press [DRIVE SELECT].
,  to select “Hour” and “Min.”
and ,  to set the recording time.
Advanced Features
OK
During recording
– You can set “Hour” and “Min.” using the
numbered buttons.
When you want to start recording
, , ,  to select “Start”,
then OK
, , ,  to select the title to
play, then OK
− Recording starts.
Notes
 You cannot record more than 8 hours.
Tips
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
To stop recording partway
Press [].
To show the remaining recording time
Press [STATUS ] to show the remaining recording time.
HDD
REC 0:59
1 DVB
BBC ONE Wales
Tips
To stop play
Press [].
To exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
To stop recording/To stop timer recording
After play stops
1. Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit the screen.
2. Press [].
3. If the recording stop confirmation screen is displayed
Press [, ] to select “Stop Recording”, then press [OK].
Remaining time
Notes
 During playing while you are recording, you cannot edit or delete
titles.
27
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 27
2009/04/27 11:45:35
Recording from a Digital Satellite Receiver
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
Manual Recording
 This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that
already have PAL signal recordings. (However, both
types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.)
Preparation:
 ]RAM\ If the disc is protected, release protection
( 68).
 Connect a digital satellite receiver to this unit’s AV2
input terminals ( 11).
 When the output signal from the external equipment
is NTSC, change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the
Setup menu ( 75).
Linked timer recordings with external
equipment (SKY Digital STB/digital satellite
receiver) — EXT LINK
To record programmes from a SKY Digital STB/digital
satellite receiver using timer programming
Preparation:
 ]RAM\ If the disc is protected, release protection
( 68).
 Make sure you connect the AV2 terminal of this unit
to “VCR Scart Terminal” of a SKY Digital STB/digital
satellite receiver with a 21-pin scart cable ( 11).
 Set the “AV2 Input” and “Ext Link” to match the
connected equipment in the Setup menu ( 75).
With the unit stopped
Make timer programming on
SKY Digital STB/digital satellite
receiver.
INPUT
SELECT
to select “AV2” for the
digital satellite receiver you have
connected.
DRIVE
SELECT
− Refer to the equipment’s operating instructions.
DRIVE
SELECT
to select the HDD or DVD
drive.
to select the HDD or DVD
drive.
− If you selected the DVD drive, insert a disc
( 81).
− If you selected the DVD drive, insert a disc
( 81).
EXT LINK
REC MODE
to select the recording
mode.
− The unit turns off and “EXT-L” lights on the
unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
− While the unit is in EXT LINK standby mode
or recording, most operations on this unit are
prohibited ([ OPEN/CLOSE], [/l] etc.).
When you operate, press [EXT LINK] to
cancel EXT LINK standby mode or recording
(The unit turns on and “EXT-L” disappears.).
Select the channel on the digital
satellite receiver.
REC
to start recording.
Tips
To skip unwanted parts
Press [] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)
To stop recording
Press [].
Tips
To cancel the external control
Press [EXT LINK] to stop recording or to cancel linked timer recording
standby (The unit turns on and “EXT-L” disappears.).
Manual timer recordings (
30)
Notes
28
 In order to prevent accidental operation, press [EXT LINK] to cancel
the setting after recording is finished.
 This function does not work when “TV System” is set to “NTSC” in
the Setup menu ( 75).
 This function does not work with some equipment. Refer to the
equipment’s operating instructions.
 The beginnings of recordings may not be recorded correctly in some
cases.
 When “Ext Link” is set to “Ext Link 2”, this function does not work if
the input signal is NTSC system.
 Programmes are recorded as one title on this unit when the end
time of the earlier timer recording and the start time of the later timer
recording are close to each other.
[HDD] [RAM] To divide the titles, go to “Divide Title” ( 49).
 When this unit is in EXT LINK standby (“EXT-L” is shown on the
unit’s display), the TV Guide data cannot be downloaded.
 While the unit is in EXT LINK standby mode or recording, AV1 output
terminal outputs the signal which is input from the AV2 input terminal
irrespective of “AV1 Output” setting ( 75).
 During EXT LINK standby mode or recording, playback is only
available from the drive performing the recording.
 When “EXT-L” lights on the unit’s display, Direct TV Recording is
unavailable.
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 28
2009/04/27 11:45:36
Recording from an External Device
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
 Turn off the unit and other video equipment before connecting.
Notes
 Almost all videos and DVD-Video on sale have been treated to
prevent illegal copying. Any software that has been so treated cannot
be recorded using this unit.
Recording from a DV Camcorder
This unit
S VIDEO
DV IN
4-pin
DV cable
VIDEO
L/MONO - AUDIO- R
AV3 IN
S Video
cable1
Audio/video
cable2
Other video equipment
[HDD] [RAM] Programmes are recorded as a single item; breaks in the
images create chapters and playlists are created automatically.
Preparation:
1 Turn off the main unit and DV equipment, then
connect the equipment with the unit’s DV input
terminal ( left).
2 Turn on the main unit.
Turn on the DV equipment, then
pause play at the point you want
to start recording.
Connect to Audio/Video output terminals.
1
You can get a sharper, clearer picture by connecting with an S Video
cable instead of the yellow video cable.
2
Connect to terminals of the same colour.
 If the audio output of the external device is monaural, connect to L/
MONO on the AV3 input terminals at the front.
“DV Auto Rec” screen may appear.
DV Auto Rec
Notes
 When timer recording starts while recording from an external device,
timer recording takes priority and recording from the external device
stops.
 If video is copied from another piece of equipment to this unit, then
the video quality will be degraded.
DV unit is connected.
Record from the DV unit?
Rec to HDD
INPUT
SELECT
to select the input where
your external device is connected.
– Front panel inputs are AV3.
Start play on the external device.
REC
at the point you want to
start recording.
Tips
To skip unwanted parts
Press [] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)
To stop recording
Press [].
 Using Flexible Recording ( 27), you can record the content of a
video cassette (approx. 1–8 hours) to a 4.7 GB disc with the best
possible quality of recording without wasting disc space.
Cancel
SELECT
RETURN
OK
When “DV Auto Rec” screen does not appear
After performing step ( above),
1. Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
2. Press [FUNCTION MENU].
3. Press [, ] to select “Others”, then press [OK].
4. Press [, ] to select “DV Auto Rec”, then press [OK].
You can proceed to step .
,  to select “Rec to HDD” or
“Rec to DVD”, then OK
Recording from a VCR, etc.
Preparation:
 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD
drive.
 Press [REC MODE] to select the recording mode
( 25).
 To reduce noise in input from a video cassette
recorder, set “Input NR” to “On” in the on-screen
display ( 67).
Rec to DVD
Advanced Features
Preparation:
 When the output signal from the external device is
NTSC, change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the
Setup menu ( 75).
This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that
already have PAL signal recordings. (However, both
types of programmes can be recorded onto the
HDD.)
REC MODE
to select the recording
mode ( 25).
 to select “Rec”, then
OK
Notes
 Only one piece of DV equipment (e.g., digital video camcorder) can
be connected to the unit via the DV input terminal.
 It is not possible to operate the unit from the connected DV
equipment.
 The DV input on this unit is for use with DV equipment only. (It
cannot be connected to a computer, etc.)
 The DV equipment name may not be shown correctly.
 Depending on the DV equipment, the images or audio may not be
input properly.
 Date and time information is not recorded, even if displayed on the
camcorder.
 You cannot record and play simultaneously.
Tips
When recording finishes
The confirmation screen appears.
Press [OK] to finish DV camcorder recording.
To stop recording
Press [].
The confirmation screen appears. Press [OK].
If the DV camcorder recording function does not work properly, check
the connections and DV equipment settings, and turn the unit off and
back on. If that does not work, follow the instructions for
“Recording from a VCR, etc.”. ( left)
29
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 29
2009/04/27 11:45:36
Advanced Timer Recording
Manual timer recordings
OK
Preparation:
 Turn on the television and select the appropriate video
input to suit the connections to this unit.
 ]RAM\ If the disc is protected, release protection ( 68).
 Insert a disc with enough remaining blank space.
 Confirm that the clock on the unit’s display is set to the
correct time.
 If connected via a digital satellite receiver, please ensure
before a timer recording starts the required channel is set
on the digital satellite receiver.
DVD 1:58 SP
TUE 18/08/09 12:54:00
Drive
No. Channel Date Start Stop HDD
DVD Mode STTL AD space
New Timer Programme
OK
RETURN
,  to select “New Timer
Programme”, then OK
Tips
 If “New Timer Programme” is already selected,
press [OK].
Channel
Remain
HDD 30:24 SP
DVD 1:58 SP
TUE 18/08/09 12:54:00
Stop HDD Mode STTL AD
DVD
-- / -- --- -- : -- -- : -- --SP --- --Date
Start
All Channels : ----Programme Name
Change
Category
--
9
Number
– You can set a daily or weekly programme
( right, Tips).
Start (start time)/Stop (end time):
– Hold button to change in 30-minute increments
or decrements.
Drive:
– HDD or DVD
When the recording drive is “DVD” and there
is not enough remaining space, recording
automatically switches to the “HDD” ( 32,
Relief Recording).
Mode:
– Recording mode (
STTL [Subtitles ( 46)]
– AUTO/OFF
1, 2
25)
MON-SAT
SUN
Language for broadcast with multi-audio
or multi-subtitle
In timer recording of broadcast with multi-audio or multisubtitle, audio and subtitle language to be recorded will follow
the setting of “DVB Preferred Multi Audio” and “DVB Preferred
Subtitles” in the Setup menu ( 71).
To cancel a timer recording in progress
:
– Auto Renewal Recording (
ON/OFF
Programme Name:
Press [OK] (
1
2
30
3
MON-FRI
Weekly timer Daily timer
Titles recorded using the same daily, weekly or series timer are
bundled and displayed as a “group” in the DIRECT NAVIGATOR
screen ( 36) except when using Auto Renewal Recording.
 You can also use the numbered buttons to enter “Channel”, “Date”,
“Start” and “Stop”.
 You can also press [DRIVE SELECT] to switch the drive, [REC
] to switch “STTL”.
MODE] to switch “Mode” and press [STTL
While the unit is on
AD [Audio Description ( 46)]1, 3:
– AUTO/OFF
RENEW
([HDD])
Channel: – TV Station Name/External Input
 When recording digital satellite programmes,
select “AV2”.
 You can press the “Blue” button to change
the category.
[e.g., Free Channels, Radio, Registered
Favourites ( 70, Favourites Edit)]
Date:
SUN-SAT
SAT
0
RETURN
Current date One month later
minus one day
---
OK
 “Date” Setting
Each press of [] changes items in the order below.
(Each press of [] changes items in the reverse order.)
Please set Channel.
To exit the timer recording list
Press [PROG/CHECK].
Timer
Recording
Notes
 “” on the unit’s display flashes when the unit cannot go to timer
recording standby.
 If two timer recording times overlap, the first recording always has
priority. The second recording will start only after the first recording
has finished.
 Recorded subtitles cannot be deleted later.
 A timer recording will not start while a disc is being formatted, deleted
or finalised. The recording begins afterwards.
 When “Channel” is set in “AV1”, “AV2” or “AV3”, “STTL” and “AD”
setting is unavailable.
Press OK to store new programme.
,  to move
through the
items and
,  to set
the items.
BBC 1 15
– “” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer
recording standby has been activated.
– Repeat steps – to programme other
recordings.
– Press [] to turn the unit off.
HDD 30:24 SP
Remain
No. Channel
01
Timer
Recording
PROG/CHECK
– The timer icon is displayed in the left column.
STOP
32)
– Confirmation screen appears.
47, Entering Text).
If “AUTO” is selected, and if the programme includes the
information of subtitles or Audio Description, they are
automatically recorded with the programme.
When there are multiple languages, select the subtitle
( 71, DVB Preferred Subtitles).
You can switch the Audio Description and change its volume
during timer recording.
 to select “Stop Recording”,
then OK
Notes
 Recording stops and the timer programme is deleted. (Daily, weekly
and series timer programmes remain and timer recording will start
from the next time the timer recording is set.)
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 30
2009/04/27 11:45:36
If the “Overlapped Timer Recording”
screen appears
If you set a timer recording that will overlap with other
timer recordings using the GUIDE Plus+ system, the
“Overlapped Timer Recording” screen appears to help
you eliminate the overlapping.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
2a
2b
to modify the programme.
, , , to make changes,
then OK
2c
When a programme with

HDD 30:24 SP
is selected
twice, then follow the onscreen instructions to resolve
overlapping.
, then ,  to select the
programme.
Remain
OK
OK
PROG/CHECK
Timer
Recording
to delete.
– You cannot delete programmes that are
currently recording.
Check, Change, Delete Programmes, or
Resolve Overlapping
The timer recording list can be viewed even when the
unit is off.
DELETE
– If the programme was set from the TV Guide,
the available repeat programmes are displayed.
Press [, ] to select, then press [OK].
– If the on-screen instructions do not appear,
change or delete the overlapped programme.
DVD 1:58 SP
TUE 18/08/09 12:54:00
Drive
No. Channel Date Start Stop HDD
DVD Mode STTL AD space
New Timer Programme

Tips
 You can enter up to 32 programmes a month in advance.
Press OK to store new programme.
OK
RETURN
 Timer Recording screen icons
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
HDD
DVD
Timer programme is active.
Currently recording
Programmes are overlapped. Recording of the programme
with the later start time starts when the earlier programme
finishes recording.
You stopped a daily, weekly or series timer recording. The
icon disappears the next time the timer recording starts
recording.
The disc was full. (not enough space)
The TV programme may not be recorded due to copyprotect.
Recording stopped (Dirty disc, etc.)
Timer programmes set to Auto Renewal Recording
( 32).
Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD
(Displayed while recording.)
Recording drive is set to HDD
Recording drive is set to DVD
 Drive space
OK:
Recordable
(Date): For daily or weekly timer recordings, the display will
show until when recordings can be made (up to one
month ahead from the present time) based on the time
remaining on the disc.
!:
It may not be possible to record because:
– there is no more space left.
– the number of possible titles has reached its
maximum.
– programmes are overlapped.
– the timer programme is deactivated.
Relief: Timer programmes that will be relief recorded to the
HDD.
 Channel name, programme name and other
information are displayed.
You can also delete a programme with the following steps.
1. Press [, ] to select the programme and press [OPTION].
2. Press [, ] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
To exit the timer recording list
Press [PROG/CHECK].
Notes
 Recording may fail if there are changes to the station’s programming.
 “” disappears from the unit’s display when no timer programme is
set or when all timer programmes are deactivated.
 “-------” is displayed on a series recording item if there will be no
episode of the series for the next 8 days. We recommend you delete
the “-------” item after you confirm the last episode of the series is
recorded.
 The “Guide Link” function may not work if you manually change the
start/end time by over 10 minutes.
 Programmes that failed to record are deleted from the timer
recording list at 4 a.m. two days later.
Advanced Features

To deactivate timer programme
(e.g. to interrupt a daily or weekly timer
programming)
After performing step  (
left)
(Red)
– “” ( left) disappears from the timer
recording list.
– Press the “Red” button again to activate timer
programme.
Tips
You can deactivate the timer programme in the following
procedure as well.
Perform step  ( left)
1. Press [OPTION]
2. Press [, ] to select “Timer Off”, then press [OK].
31
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 31
2009/04/27 11:45:37
Advanced Timer Recording
Relief Recording
Making timer recordings on the television
When the recording drive is “DVD” and there is not
enough remaining blank space, recording automatically
switches to the “HDD”. If there is no disc in the tray or
the disc cannot be recorded on or when timer recording
starts while copying, the recording drive will be altered to
the HDD.
 The DIRECT NAVIGATOR shows which programmes
were relief-recorded (“ ” is displayed.) ( 36).
 If the time remaining on the HDD is insufficient, as
much of the programme as possible will be recorded
onto the HDD.
[HDD]
To make a timer recording with your television, connect
to a television with a Q Link function ( 44) that you can
use for setting timer recordings using a fully wired 21-pin
Scart cable ( 10,11).
Make timer programming on the
TV.

Auto Renewal Recording
[HDD]
If you record a programme onto HDD repeatedly
everyday or every week using timer recording, or if you
record a programme of series onto HDD repeatedly
using Series timer recording, the unit will record the new
programme over the old one.
This function can be used only when daily, weekly or
series timer recording is selected.
PROG/CHECK
,  to select the programme,
then OK
,  to select “RENEW” column.
,  to select “ON”, then
Timer
Recording
Remain
HDD 30:24 SP
OK
DVD 1:58 SP
TUE 18/08/09 12:54:00
HDD
Channel Date Start Stop
AD RENEW
DVD Mode STTL
ON
1 BBC 1 SUN 22:00 22:30 HDD SP OFF OFF
All Channels : BBC 1
Programme Name
Notes
 If a programme set for Auto Renewal Recording is protected or
while play back is taking place from the HDD, or while copying,
the programme will not be overwritten. Instead the programme
set for recording will be saved as a separate programme, and this
programme will be the one to be overwritten when the next Auto
Renewal Recording takes place.
 Playlists made from programmes that were set for Auto Renewal
Recording are deleted along with auto renewal.
 When there is not enough space on the HDD, the programme may
not be recorded completely.
to turn the unit off.
– The start and end of recording is controlled
by TV.
– The titles are recorded to the HDD.
Tips
To stop recording
Press [].
Notes
 When this unit is in EXT LINK standby (“EXT-L” on the unit’s display
lights), recording from TV does not start.
 Programmes are recorded as one title on this unit when the end
time of the earlier timer recording and the start time of the later timer
recording are close to each other.
To divide the titles, go to “Divide Title” (
49).
Notes on timer recording
 During timer recording standby, this unit cannot play discs or titles
recorded on HDD that do not match the “TV System” setting. It is
recommended “TV System” be set to match the discs or title before
playing them. But to prevent the failure of the timer recording, change
back the settings before the recording starts. ( 75)
 Timer recordings are activated regardless of whether the unit is
turned on/off.
 Timer recordings begin when the set time is reached even when
playing.
 Timer recordings do not begin while editing or copying in normal
speed mode ( 56).
 If the unit is turned on when timer recording begins, it remains turned
on after recording finishes. It does not turn off automatically. You can
turn the unit off during timer recording.
 When you programme successive timer recordings to start
immediately one after the other, the unit cannot record the part at the
beginning of the later programmes.
Programme
Programme
Not recorded
Recorded
Recorded
 The “Overlapped Timer Recording” screen may be displayed
immediately after you turn on this unit, if new overlapping occurred.
Refer to “Check, Change, Delete Programmes, or Resolve
Overlapping” ( 31).
32
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 32
2009/04/27 11:45:37
GUIDE Plus+ system
What is the GUIDE Plus+ system?
The GUIDE Plus+ system gives you an overview of digital television and radio programmes up to 7 days in
advance. For many of these programmes, you can select additional information provided by the stations. You can
search the programme preview according to various topics such as sport, films etc., according to categories such
as TV or radio. Also, you can search for programmes using programme information such as programme names
etc. You can easily find the desired programmes and set Timer recording.
Landscape view
RadioTimes
TV Guide: Landscape
Tue 18/08/09
19:45
All Types
Tue 18th
10 Channel 4+1
All Channels
Channel 4 News
Time:
Advertisement
BBC 1

BBC 2
Timer icon
( 22)
Channel 4
Channel 5
2
-24 hours
TIMER REC
RETURN
Hollyoaks
Channel 4 News
 The Gemstar branding
partner will supply the
rating information in the
programme information and
the recommended group in
the Prog.Type list.

Prog. Type
+24 hours
OPTION: Select Advert, etc.
info
Guide Change Display Mode
Category
Page
Selected
programme
Tue 18th
10 Channel 4+1
Channel 4
More 4
Tue 18/08/09
19:45
19:30
20:00
21:00
22:00
23:00
00:05
-24 hours
TIMER REC
RETURN
+24 hours
Landscape view
Press [, ] to select a channel.
Portrait view
Press [, ] to select a channel.
The GUIDE Plus+ list appears for this
channel.
To view a
programme list for
another day
 Jump ahead 24 hours
Press the “Green” button to jump ahead
by one day.
 Jump back 24 hours
Press the “Red” button.
You can only jump back to the current
date. Past information cannot be viewed.
To change the page
of the GUIDE Plus+
list
Press [,  CH].
To see programme
Press [STATUS ].
information
TV Guide
Tue 18th
(programme
Spending Other People’s Money
BBC ONE Wales, Lifestyle
name, programme
19:30-20:00. 30min.
A flashy car salesman loses his cool when his stingy friend
duration, broadcast
takes over his wallet. He’s forced to sell his possessions
at a car boot sale to pay for food. [S]
time, description)
(Programmes with the
 Press [] and [] to scroll up and down.
symbol)
To show other pages
Press [CH] (Previous) or [ CH] (Next).
To return to the GUIDE Plus+ list
Press [STATUS ].
To return to the
previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
20:00
21:00
22:00
23:00
00:05
00:10
All Types
ITV 4
All Channels
E4
Hollyoaks
Channel 4 News
How to Look Good Naked
The Secret Millionaire
Love Trap
3 Minute Wonder
Prog. Type
To switch between Landscape view
and Portrait view
Press [GUIDE].
Category
OPTION: Select Advert, etc.
info
Guide Change Display Mode
Using the GUIDE Plus+ list
To change channels
RadioTimes
TV Guide: Portrait
GUIDE
Portrait view:
This is convenient to narrow down
channels to search for the programme
you want to watch.
GUIDE
Page
Landscape view:
The GUIDE Plus+ system offers
detailed information as if you see a TV
programme magazine.
This is convenient to check the status of
Timer recording.
Page
Portrait view
Page
View advertisement
Enter your postcode when using this function for the first time ( 76,
Post Code) and leave the unit in standby over night to capture the
information.
If you have already entered your postcode in Owner ID ( 13), you do
not have to enter again.
If you enter an incorrect postcode for your area, or no postcodes are
entered, advertisement may not be displayed correctly.
To display advertisement information
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [, ] to select “Select Advert”, then press [OK].

While the advertisement information is not captured, “Enter Words”
screen is displayed. ( 35, Searching by entering words)
 To display the latest advertisement, you will need to update the
information.
 To update the information continuously, this unit must be left in
standby mode over night.
To change advertisements
Press [, ].
To return to TV Guide
Press [RETURN ].
Advanced Features
Broadcast date
Broadcast time
Logo of the Gemstar branding partner
Notes
 Some advertisements are for future programmes and you can set the
timer recording of the programmes using the advertisement screen.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
 The information from the GUIDE Plus+ system will not be lost even if
the unit is turned off at the mains outlet.
Tips
When the unit displays “No Data” or the empty GUIDE Plus+ list:
TV Guide: Landscape
Tue 18/08/09
19:45
All Types
Tue 18th
All Channels
Time:
Notes
 The receipt of the GUIDE Plus+ system data is only possible via
the aerial input of this unit. The receipt of the GUIDE Plus+ data via
externally connected digital satellite receivers is not possible.
 The GUIDE Plus+ system setup will not work if the clock is not set
correctly or the wrong postcode is selected.
BBC 1
BBC 2
The “empty” field
Channel 4
Channel 5
2
 Some digital broadcast may not send programme information.
Set the timer recording manually ( 30, Manual timer
recordings).
33
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 33
2009/04/27 11:45:37
GUIDE Plus+ system
Series recording
You can record all the episodes of a series by setting just
one timer recording using the GUIDE Plus+ system.
GUIDE
Selecting the programme from the desired
programme type or category
This function lets you display a GUIDE Plus+ list sorted
by programme type (e.g. Movie, Sport) or category (e.g.
Free Channels, Radio).
– The GUIDE Plus+ list appears.
,  ,  to select the series
programme, then OK
GUIDE
– The GUIDE Plus+ list appears.
2a
− If the same episode has already been set for
series timer recording at a different time or on
another channel, “Series Timer Rec.” will not
be selectable.
Selection Screen
Timer
Recording
HDD 30:24 SP
Remain
DVD 1:58 SP
Start Stop HDD
DVD Mode STTL AD RENEW
2 BBC 2 18/ 8 TUE 20:30 22:30 HDD SP OFF OFF OFF
View
Channel
Single Timer Rec.
2 BBC 2
News
Tue 18/08/09
20:30࡯22:30
2b
TUE 18/08/09 12:54:00
Tue 18/08/09 12:54
OK
Programme Name
Press OK to store the programme.
Series Info
OK
RETURN
− A list appears with all programmes of the
selected item.
− When you select the landscape view, the
programmes that belong to the selected
programme type are highlighted.
 DELETE
RETURN
OK
− You cannot change “Channel” and “Date”.
With “Start” and “Stop” automatically set
by the “Guide Link” function, “Start” can be
changed back by up to 10 minutes and “Stop”
can be changed forward by up to 10 minutes.
− This unit automatically records the
programmes that are identified to be of the
same series by the GUIDE Plus+ data.
− Titles recorded using series recording are
bundled and displayed as a “group” in the
DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen ( 36) except
when using Auto Renewal Recording.
TV Guide: Landscape
Tue 18/08/09
19:45
Emmerdale : In today’s show we will...
BBC 2
Channel 4
Channel 5
SELECT
RETURN
To check the schedule of the series
Press the “Blue” button after performing steps − (
above).
Series Information
S
Contents
25/08 Tue
21:30-22:30
Decameron 2
S BBC2
01/09 Tue
21:30-22:30
Decameron 3
S BBC2
08/09 Tue
21:30-22:30
Decameron 4
BBC2
15/09 Tue
21:30-22:30
Decameron 1
R
: The episode to be recorded
: Repeat programme
OPTION: Select Advert, etc.
info
Guide Change Display Mode
Category
Page
Page
, , ,  to select the
programme.
 The broadcasters allocate individual programmes to topic areas.
This function does not work properly unless the information which
distinguishes the programme type and categories sent from
broadcast stations is correct.
 If the unit is disconnected from the AC mains, all programme data
are lost.
 The programme list is available immediately if this unit has found
a digital station and loaded the information in the memory. This
process can take a while depending on the particular station.
 The programme list data are continuously downloaded in the
background when the unit is turned on. That means that the
programme list can sometimes change while you are looking at it.
R
Notes
 If the unit cannot record the first run, the unit will record the repeat
programme if it is available. However, this unit will not record the
repeat programme, if any part of the first run is recorded.
 The series recording will be cancelled if there has been no episode
of the series for 13 weeks.
34
Prog. Type
Notes
Tips
S BBC2

2
+24 hours
e. g.,
Programme type,
“News” is selected
in step  of
Landscape view.
After searching
35, Tips in “Searching using
programme information of titles recorded to the
HDD”
Series recording icon

All Channels
Time:
[S]
Decameron 1
News
Tue 18th
BBC 1
y
18/08 Tue
21:30-22:30
to display the
list of categories.
,  to select the desired item.
(Blue)
All Channels : BBC 2
Holiday Programme
(Guide Link) (Series)
Delete
BBC2
All Channels
All Channels
Free Channels
Radio
Data
Favourite 1
Favourite 2
Favourite 3
Favourite 4
Date
Series Timer Rec.
OK
Tue 18/08/09 10:35
Name
Date
to display the
list of programme
type.
(Yellow)
,  to select “Series Timer
Rec.”, then OK
Holiday Programme
All Types
All Types
Movie
News
Entertainment
Sport
Children’s
Education
Lifestyle
Drama
Tips
To return to the previous GUIDE Plus+ list before you have
selected the programme type or categories
Select “All Types” of the programme type and “All Channels” of the
categories in step  above.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 34
2009/04/27 11:45:37
Searching for the programme from the
GUIDE Plus+ list
Preparation:
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
During play or while stopped
You can search for programmes from the GUIDE Plus+
list using the programme information.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Searching by entering words
10/10
Chantal Show
By entering words, you can search for programmes from
the GUIDE Plus+ list using the programme information.
Previous
OK
RETURN
OPTION
Grouped Titles
11/10
Dolphins
VIDEO
MUSIC
2
Next
Page 02/02
Select
PICTURE
Previous
Next
When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red”
button to select “VIDEO”.
GUIDE
, , ,  to select the title,
then OPTION
– The GUIDE Plus+ list appears.
OPTION
Select Advert
Free Word Search
,  to select “Free Word
Search”, then OK
,  to select “TV Guide
Explorer”, then OK
Enter the word you would like to
search for, then STOP
,  to select “Series
Timer Rec” or “Find
Titles”, then OK
47, Entering text
Find Titles
− When “Series Timer Rec” is selected
Go to step of “Series recording” ( 34)
− When “Find Titles” is selected
Go to step ( below)
,  to select “Simplified
Search” or “Detailed Search”,
then OK
Advanced Features
Entry method
Series Timer Rec
STOP
Free Word Search
Simplified Search:
It searches the
Detailed Search may result in
many hits, but
programme names
search time will be longer.
only.
Detailed Search: It searches all the information on
the programmes. It might take more time to search
the desired programme.
Simplified Search
Detailed Search
− When searching using a word other than the title
name, enter a different word. ( 47, Entering text)
,  to select “Simplified
Search” or “Detailed Search”,
then OK
TV Guide: Portrait
Tue 18/08/09
19:45
Search results for “Dog”
Tue 18th
11 SKY THREE
SKY THRE Premier R
Virgin Radi
Clyde 1
Thu 20th
-24 hours
Fri 21st
19:30 20:00
22:00 22:30
19:30 20:00
− Refer to step  ( left) for more information about
“Simplified Search” and “Detailed Search”.
The Dog Whispe...
The Dog Whispe...
Prog. Type
The Dog Whispe...
, , ,  to select the
programme.
Search results appear.
, , ,  to select the
programme.
After searching
right, Tips in “Searching using
programme information of titles recorded to the
HDD”
Tips
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
It may return to the GUIDE Plus+ screen.
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Searching using programme information of
titles recorded to the HDD
[HDD]
You can search for programmes using programme
information of titles recorded to the HDD. Also, if you
select “Series Timer Rec”, you can easily search for the
programme series and set series timer recordings.
After searching
below, Tips
Notes
 Searching by “Series Timer Rec” only works with titles recorded via
GUIDE Plus+.
 If you press [RETURN ], the unit may return to the DIRECT
NAVIGATOR screen.
Tips
After searching
 Press [OK].
 If “Timer Recording” screen appears
Go to step  of “Timer recording” ( 22)
If “Selection Screen” appears
Press [, ] to select the item.
 “View”
19, Selecting a Channel without the GUIDE Plus+
system
 “Single Timer Rec.”
22, Timer recording, step 
 “Series Timer Rec.”
34, Series recording, step 
 “Delete”
Timer recordings can be cancelled.
Press [, ] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
– The timer icon disappears.
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
35
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 35
2009/04/27 11:45:38
Advanced Playback
Selecting Titles to Play
You can easily select and play recorded programmes by
using DIRECT NAVIGATOR.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R\DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[-RW‹VR›]
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
All Titles
VIDEO
HDD
007
PICTURE
MUSIC
Grouped Titles screen
Two or more titles recorded in
the Daily/weekly or series timer
recording mode are bundled and
displayed as one item.
(in Thumbnail Display)
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
10/10
Chantal Show
BBC 1 10/10 FRI
BBC 1 11/10 SAT
---
Previous
---
RETURN
Previous
Page 02/02
OPTION
Next
Previous
Select
Next
[HDD] [RAM]
When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red”
button to select “VIDEO”.
, , ,  to select the title you
want to watch, then OK
Tips
To select the title with the numbered buttons
e.g.,
[HDD]
5:
15: [0]
[0]
[0]
[5]
115: [1]
[1]
[5]
e.g.,
[1]
To exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Not recorded due to recording protection (Digital
broadcasts, etc.)

It cannot be played because data is damaged, etc.

Currently recording.
Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD
( 32, Relief Recording)
“One time only recording” restriction (
96, CPRM)
Groups of titles ([HDD] only)
Title that was recorded but has not yet been played
([HDD] only)
Title recorded using a different encoding system from
that of the TV system currently selected on the unit.
 Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit
( 75).
Switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR
appearance
OPTION
PICTURE
009
BBC 10/10 FRI
Chantal Show
---
BBC 11/10 SAT
Dolphins
---
BBC 18/10 SAT
Dolphins
---
MUSIC
Page 02/02
Previous
Next
Previous
Select
Next
RETURN
Next
Page 02/02
OPTION
Select
Previous
Next
[HDD] (All Titles screen in Table Display only)
This function is convenient when searching for one title to playback
from many titles.
 Press [OPTION].
 Press [,] to select “Sort”, then press [OK].
 Press [,] to select the item, then press [OK].
If you select an item other than “No.”
The DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen will reappear after
playback of the selected title has finished. (You cannot play
titles continuously.)
Skip and Time Slip will only function with the title currently
being played back.
If you exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen, or switch
to another DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen, the sort will be
cancelled.
To play grouped titles [HDD]
 Press [,,,] to select the group, then press [OK].
 Press [,,,] to select the title, then press [OK].
 Press [,,, ] to select a title or a group, then
press [].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary titles.
Press [] to cancel.
 Press [OPTION].
 Press [,] to select the option, then press [OK].
Create Group:
Press [,] to select “Create”, then press [OK].
Selected titles are bundled to form a group.
Release Grouping
Press [,] to select “Release”, then press [OK].
 When a group of titles has been selected, all the titles in the
group are released.
 When a title in a group has been selected, the title is released
from the group.
Regarding the group name
The name of the first title in the group is used as the group name.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
10/10
Chantal Show
Previous
“Grouped Titles”/“All Titles” [HDD]
“Table Display”/“Thumbnail Display”
 While the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen is displayed
Press [OPTION].
 Press [,] to select the item, then press [OK].
e.g.,
PICTURE / MUSIC
VIDEO
008
[HDD] (Grouped Titles screen only)
Protected.
36
2
All Titles
007
To edit the group of titles [HDD]
DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons
All Titles
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
To sort the titles for easy searching
[5]
To view other pages
Press [, , , ] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press [OK].
(Thumbnail Display only)
– You can also press [, ] to view other pages.
Table Display
MUSIC
Select the item marked with
and press [OK] to display the
bundled titles.
[RAM] [-R] [-R\DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
5:
15: [1]
[0]
[5]
[5]
(NTSC)
(PAL)
PICTURE
OK
OK
RETURN
11/10
Dolphins
VIDEO
---
008
---
OK
Grouped Titles
All Titles screen
Displays all titles.
(in Thumbnail Display)
“Table Display” or “Thumbnail Display”
“Grouped Titles” or “All Titles” [HDD]
OK
RETURN
OPTION
Grouped Titles
11/10
Dolphins
PICTURE
MUSIC
2
Page 02/02
Select
VIDEO
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
BBC 11/10 SAT
Dolphins
Next
Previous
Previous
Next
OK
RETURN
OPTION
Grouped Titles
VIDEO
BBC 18/10 SAT
Dolphins 2
Page 01/01
Next
Select
To change the group name
1 Press [, , , ] to select the group and press [OPTION].
2 Press [, ] to select “Edit” and press [OK].
3 Press [, ] to select “Enter Title Name” and press [OK].
4 Enter the name. ( 47, Entering Text)
 Even if the group name is changed, the title names in the group will
not be changed.
Notes
 This function is only available for Videos and not available for music
or still pictures.
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 36
2009/04/27 11:45:39
Search
Frame-by-Frame Viewing
During playback
or
– There are 5 search speeds. Each press increases
the search speed. ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] up to 3 speeds)
– Press [] (PLAY) to restart normal playback.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R\DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
While paused
OK
Tips
– Each press shows the next or previous frame.
– Press and hold to advance or reverse frame-byframe in succession.
– Press [] (PLAY) to restart normal playback.
Skip
You can skip to the beginning (or the end) of Title/
Chapter. Skip is operated for each chapter.
During playback or while paused
or
– Each press increases the number of skips.
– DivX: Press [] to return to the beginning of the
title currently playing.
Quick View (Play 1.3)
[HDD] [RAM]
Allows you to increase the play speed slightly without
distorting the audio.
During playback
PLAY/x1.3
Notes
 [VCD] allow Frame-by-Frame in the forward direction only.
Time Slip
[HDD] [RAM]
[-R] [-R\DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] (This function does not
work with finalised discs.)
[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Use to skip in 1-minute or 10-minute increments.
During playback TIME SLIP
(Press and hold.)
,  to select the time, then
– Press again to return to normal speed.
During playback, you can access specific titles or
scenes through direct entry of the numbered buttons.
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
DELETE
INPUT
0 SELECT
OK
– Each time you press [, ], the time
increases [] or decreases [] by 1-minute
intervals.
– Press and hold for 10-minute intervals.
Direct Play
[HDD] and DivX
e.g., 5:
[0] [0]
15:
[0] [1]
MP3/WMA
e.g., 5:
[0] [0]
15:
[0] [0]
 Other discs
Input a 2-digit number
e.g., 5:
[0]
[5]
15:
[1]
[5]
Advanced Features
Depending on the disc, search may not be possible.
[5]
[5]
[0]
[1]
[5]
[5]
Manual Skip
[HDD] [RAM]
[-R] [-R\DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] (This function does not
work with finalised discs.)
[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Skips approx. 1 minute forward with each press.
During playback MANUAL SKIP
Slow-motion Play
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R\DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
While paused
or
– There are 5 slow-motion speeds. Each press
increases the speed.
– Press [] (PLAY) to restart normal playback.
Create Chapters
[HDD] [RAM]
When creating chapters in your favourite scenes, you
can easily reach the head of scene using [, ]
(SKIP) or play on Chapter View. ( 50)
CREATE
During playback CHAPTER
Notes
 If continued for approx. 5 minutes, slow-motion play pauses
automatically (except [DVD-V] [VCD]).
 [VCD] allow slow-motion in the forward direction only.
Tips
 Chapters cannot be created during EXT LINK standby (
28).
37
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 37
2009/04/27 11:45:39
Playing DivX, Music files and Still Pictures (JPEG)
Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive
are applicable to the DMR-EX89 model only.
Playing DivX video contents
Showing the menu screen
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO:
DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, Inc. This
is an official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video.
You can play DivX video contents recorded with a
computer onto DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and
USB memory.
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [SD]
 Insert the disc or card.
 If the disc or card contains different file types
e.g., [CD]
Disc
Play Video ( DivX)
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Play Music ( MP3&WMA )
Copy Music ( MP3&WMA )
Show DivX Menu screen.
(
e.g., [SD]
left, Showing the menu screen)
Folder1 : 00025
DivX Menu
CD (DivX)
N o.
SD Card
001
Tree
Title Name
ABC.avi
Copy Video (MPEG2)
Play Pictures (JPEG)
Copy New Pictures (JPEG)
SELECT
OK
Page
RETURN
Total Title : 001
001/001
OK
RETURN
Press [, ] to select the item, then press [OK].
 Files are treated as titles.
Otherwise,
1 While stopped
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.
2 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
,  to select the title, then
 You can also select the title with the numbered buttons.
e.g., 5:
[0]
[0]
[5]
15: [0]
[1]
[5]
[USB]
 Insert the USB memory.
USB device
Play Video ( DivX )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy All Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Play Music ( MP3&WMA )
Copy Music ( MP3&WMA )
Update CD database on HDD
SELECT
OK
OK
Play starts on the selected title.
Tips
To stop playing
Press [].
To show other pages
Press [, ].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
RETURN
You can also display this screen with the following
steps.
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [, ] to select “Drive Select”, then press
[OK].
3 Press [, ] to select “USB”, then press [OK].
Notes
 Picture sizes set at the recording time may prevent the unit from
showing pictures in the adequate aspect. You may be able to adjust
the aspect through the TV.
 Successive play is not possible.
 Playback is not possible if recording is performed on the HDD drive
or the DVD drive.
 Press [, ] to select the item and press [OK].
Changing the file type to play
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
 Press [RETURN ] several times to exit the menu.
 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Using the tree screen to find a folder
 While the file list is displayed
Press [] while a title is highlighted to display the tree
screen.
F: Selected folder no./Total folder no. including DivX title.
FUNCTION MENU
CD(DivX)
Playback
Recording
DivX
Picture
Music
DivX Menu
CD (DivX)
Folder
F 1/21
Copy
12.02.2009
Image001
Image002
Image003
Image004
Image005
Image006
Image007
Image008
Image009
Image010
DATA1
DATA2
TV Guide
Others
Drive Select
OK
RETURN
 [-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
1 Press [, ] to select “Playback”, then press [OK].
2 Press [, ] to select the file type, then press [OK].
[USB]
1 Press [, ] to select “Drive Select”, then press
[OK].
2 Press [, ] to select “USB”, then press [OK].
3 Press [, ] to select the item, then press [OK].
38
OK
RETURN
You cannot select
folders that contain no
compatible files.
 Press [, ] to select a folder, then press [OK].
The file list for the folder appears.
Tips
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 38
2009/04/27 11:45:39
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND:
This DivX® Certified device must be registered in order to play DivX
Video-on-Demand (VOD) content.
First generate the DivX VOD registration code for your device and
submit it during the registration process. [Important: DivX VOD
content is protected by a DivX DRM (Digital Rights Management)
system that restricts playback to registered DivX Certified devices. If
you try to play DivX VOD content not authorized for your device, the
message “Authorisation Error.” will be displayed and your content will
not play.] Learn more at www.divx.com/vod.
Playing music files
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
You can play MP3/WMA files recorded with a computer
onto a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB
memory.
 You cannot play MP3 or WMA files on the USB
memory while recording or copying.
Show MP3&WMA Menu screen.
(
Display the unit’s registration code.
( 76, “DivX Registration” in “Others” tab)
Selected group
DivX Registration
Setup
MP3&WMA Menu
CD
G
1
T
1
TOTAL
1/111
DivX (R) Video On Demand
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others
38, Showing the menu screen)
Your registration code is : XXXXXXXX
8 alphanumeric characters
To learn more visit www.divx.com/vod
Number
0 – 9
Prev.
Next
OK
RETURN
 After playing DivX VOD content for the first time, another registration
code is then displayed in “DivX Registration”. Do not use this
registration code to purchase DivX VOD content. If you use this
code to purchase DivX VOD content, and then play the content
on this unit, you will no longer be able to play any content that you
purchased using the previous code.
 If you purchase DivX VOD content using a registration code different
from this unit’s code, you will not be able to play this content.
(“Authorisation Error.” is displayed.)
Regarding DivX content that can only be played a set number of
times
Some DivX VOD content can only be played a set number of times.
When you play this content, the remaining number of plays is
displayed. You cannot play this content when the number of remaining
plays is zero. (“Rental Expired.” is displayed.)
When playing this content
 The number of remaining plays is reduced by one if
– you press [].
– you press [].
– you press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
– you press [] or [, ] etc. and arrive at another content or
the start of the content being played.
– timer recording starts on the HDD.
– you press [DRIVE SELECT] to change the drive.
 Resume functions do not work.
No.
1 :
Total
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Group
My favorite
Track
001 Both Ends Freezing
002 Lady Starfish
003 Life on Jupiter
004 Metal Glue
005 Paint It Yellow
006 Pyjamamama
007 Shrimps from Mars
008 Starperson
Tree
: Group No.
: Track No. in the
group
: Track No./Total
tracks in all
groups
,  to select a track, then
to play.
OK
Tips
“
” indicates the track currently playing.
Advanced Features
Regarding DivX VOD content
To stop playing
Press [].
To exit the menu screens
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
To view other pages
Press [, ].
To select the track with the numbered buttons
e.g.,
“5”:
[0]
[0]
[0]
[5]
“15”:
[0]
[0]
[1]
[5]
Using the Tree Screen to Find a Group
From the track list
 while a track is highlighted to
display the tree screen.
MP3&WMA Menu
CD
G
8
T
14
TOTAL
40/111
Tree
MP3 music
Number
0 – 9
G 7/25
001 My favorite
001 Brazilian pops
002 Chinese pops
003 Czech pops
004 Hungarian pops
005 Liner notes
006 Japanese pops
007 Mexican pops
: Selected Group No./Total Group No.
If the group has no compatible track, “--” is
displayed as the group number.
: You cannot select a group that contains no
compatible track.
,  to select a group, then
OK
– The track list for the selected group appears.
Tips
To return to the track list
Press [RETURN ].
39
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 39
2009/04/27 11:45:40
Playing DivX, Music files and Still Pictures (JPEG)
Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive
are applicable to the DMR-EX89 model only.
Tips
DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons
Picture and folder protected
Playing still pictures
Album that has not yet been viewed ([HDD] [RAM])
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
[-R] [-R]DL[ [CD] [USB]
 [EX89] Inserting, removing the SD card (
81)
Show Album View screen.
[-R] [-R]DL[ [CD] [USB] [SD]
( 38, Showing the menu screen)
[HDD] [RAM]
While stopped
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.
2 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the
“Green” button to select “PICTURE”.
Album View screen
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Album View
HDD
001
VIDEO
Total 5
Date: 1/ 1/2006
MUSIC
Regarding Album
View screen
right
Total 3
Date: 1/ 2/2006
---
---
---
Page 01/01
Previous
OK
PICTURE
---
002
OPTION
RETURN
PICTURE
To view other pages
Press [, , , ] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press [OK].
– You can also press [, ] to view other pages.
To select the still picture or album with the numbered buttons
Album
e.g.,
“5”:
[0]
[0]
[5]
“15”:
[0]
[1]
[5]
“115”:
[1]
[1]
[5]
Still picture
e.g.,
“5”:
“15”:
“115”:
“1115”:
[0]
[0]
[0]
[1]
[0]
[0]
[1]
[1]
[0]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[5]
[5]
[5]
[5]
e.g., HDD
Regarding Album View screen
Still pictures copied from USB memories and SD cards are
grouped by the shooting date in the HDD or DVD-RAM.
You can arrange these still pictures and create an album ( 53).
[HDD] [RAM]
Grouped by date
103__DVD
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
----
----
----
Previous
RETURN
To exit the menu screens
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Press OK to show
pictures.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Picture (JPEG) View
HDD
OK
To return to the Album View screen or Picture (JPEG) View
screen
Press [RETURN ].
Next
Slideshow
, , ,  to select the album,
then OK
Album Name
To stop viewing a picture
Press [].
Page 001/001
OPTION
Next
Slideshow
, , ,  to select the still
picture, then OK
002
Total 68
Date: 10/10/2007
Number of pictures/Shooting date
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL[ [CD] [USB] [SD]
Album
002
Notes
 Still pictures cannot be played during recording or copying.
10/10/07
Total 24
Zoological park
Shooting date/Number of pictures/Album name
 Depending on the digital camera, the editing software on the
PC etc., the information about the recording date may not be
displayed. In this case, the date will appear as [--/--/--].
40
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 40
2009/04/27 11:45:40
Notes
Slideshow
You can display still pictures one by one with regular
interval.
From the Album View screen
, , ,  to select an album, then
PLAY/x1.3
You can also start Slideshow with the following
steps.
 From the Album View screen
Press [, , , ] to select the desired album,
then press [OPTION].
 Press [, ] to select “Start Slideshow”, then
press [OK].
To return to the picture to its original position
Press [, ] to select the opposite rotation in step , then press
[OK].
 Rotation information will not be stored.
– [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Still pictures
– When disc, card or album is protected
– When played on other equipment
– When copying pictures
– When changing date
 If you remove the SD card while the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen
is displayed, picture rotation information may not be properly stored.
Remove the SD card after you exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen.
Zoom
While playing a picture
OPTION
Tips
To stop the Slideshow
Press [].
To zoom in:
To repeat play
1 In step  above, press [, ] to select “Slideshow Setting”, then
press [OK].
2 Press [, ] to select “Repeat Play”.
3 Press [, ] to select “On”.
4 Press [, ] to select “Set”.
5 Press [OK].
Slideshow with music
You can add music to Slideshow.
1 In step  above, press [, ] to select “Slideshow Setting”, then
press [OK].
2 Press [, ] to select “Soundtrack”
3 Press [, ] to select “On”.
4 Press [, ] to select “Select Soundtrack”, then press [OK].
5 Press [, ] to select the storage location of soundtrack, then press
[OK].
6 Press [, ] to select an album for soundtrack, then press [OK].
7 Press [, ] to select “Set”.
 Music albums on HDD and on USB memory can be used as the
slideshow Soundtrack. However, when selecting still images on
USB memory for the slideshow, music albums on the USB memory
cannot be used as the soundtrack. (Even if a music album on USB
memory is selected, the music is not played.)
Rotate RIGHT
,  to select “Zoom
in”, then OK
Rotate LEFT
Zoom in
OK
RETURN
Notes
Advanced Features
To change the interval at which pictures are displayed
1 In step  above, press [, ] to select “Slideshow Setting”, then
press [OK].
2 Press [, ] to select “Display interval”.
3 Press [, ] to select desired interval (Short/Normal/Long).
4 Press [, ] to select “Set”.
5 Press [OK].
To return to the picture to its original size
Press [, ] to select “Zoom out” in step , then press [OK].
 When zooming in, the still picture may be cut off.
 “Zoom in” information is not stored.
 “Zoom in” and “Zoom out” do not work with images that have a
resolution larger than 640480 pixels.
Picture Properties
Picture information is shown (e.g., shooting date).
While playing a picture
STATUS
twice to display picture properties.
18:53:50 11/10
Folder - Picture No. 103 - 0006
Date
1/ 1/ 2009
No.
3/9
Shooting Date
STATUS
again to exit.
Or
From the Picture (JPEG) View screen
Rotate Pictures
, , ,  to select the picture,
then OPTION
While playing a picture
OPTION
,  to select “Properties”, then
OK
,  to select “Rotate
RIGHT” or “Rotate
LEFT”, then OK
Rotate RIGHT
Information (e.g., image size and file size) is
shown.
–To exit the Properties screen, press [OK].
Rotate LEFT
OK
RETURN
Notes
 Depending on the camera or editing software; shooting dates
may not be displayed correctly.
41
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 41
2009/04/27 11:45:40
Playing music
Tips
To play music CD
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Preparation:
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
Insert a music CD.
Notes
The menu is automatically displayed.
 You cannot play music tracks on HDD while recording or copying.
 When this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes while the
screen is being displayed, the screen saver is displayed if “Screen
Saver” is set to “On” in the Setup menu ( 74). To return to the
previous screen, press [OK].
CD
Play Music
Copy Music
SELECT
OK
RETURN
,  to select “Play Music”, then
OK
The unit starts accessing the Gracenote®
database ( 64) and searches for the title
information.
If search results indicate that multiple titles
were found
Press [, ] to select the appropriate title and
press [OK].
,  to select the track, then
OK
 You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.
e.g., “5”: [0]
[5], “15”: [1]
[5]
Useful functions during music play
Operations during play
Stop
Press [].
The stopped position is memorized.
Press [] (PLAY) to restart from this position.
 If [] is pressed several times, the position
is cleared.
Pause
Press [].
Press [] again or [] (PLAY) to restart play.
Search
Press [] or [].
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
Press [] (PLAY) to restart play.
Skip
During play or while paused, press []
or [].
Skip to the track you want to play.
Each press increases the number of skips.
Tips
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Playback continues.
Repeat
Play
[HDD]
To play music recorded on HDD
Copying music to HDD
64
Preparation:
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
Sort
[HDD]
When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the
“Yellow” button to select “MUSIC”.
,  to select the album, then
OK
 You can also select the album with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
“5”:
[0]
[0]
[5]
“15”:
[0]
[1]
[5]
“115”:
[1]
[1]
[5]
,  to select the track, then
Properties
[HDD] [CD]
You can select the item which you want to
repeat.
While playing
 Press [OPTION].
 Press [, ] to select “Repeat Play
Setting”, then press [OK].
 Press [, ] to select the item, then press
[OK].
 Select “Off” to cancel repeat play.
You can change the order of the Album View
alphabetically.
While Album View screen is displayed
 Press [OPTION].
 Press [, ] to select “Sort”, then press
[OK].
 Press [, ] to select “Album Name”, then
press [OK].
To cancel the sorted screen
Press [, ] to select “No.”, then press [OK].
While Track View screen is displayed
 Press [OPTION].
 Press [, ] to select “Properties”, then
press [OK].
To exit the Properties screen, press [OK].
OK
 You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
“5”:
[0]
[0]
[0]
[5]
“15”:
[0]
[0]
[1]
[5]
“115”:
[0]
[1]
[1]
[5]
“1115”: [1]
[1]
[1]
[5]
42
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 42
2009/04/27 11:45:41
Convenient Functions
FUNCTION MENU Display
By using the FUNCTION MENU you may access the
main functions quickly and easily.
If “FUNCTION MENU Display” is set to “On” in the
Setup menu, FUNCTION MENU automatically appears
when you turn the power on. ( 74)
With the unit stopped
C
FUN
TION MENU
Remain
Delete
30:00 SP
TV Guide
Others
Drive Select
RETURN
OK
OK
Video
Picture
Music
Copy
OK
To exit the FUNCTION MENU
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
You can pause the TV programme you are watching using this
unit’s tuner and resume later by temporarily saving it on the
HDD. This is useful when you have to briefly stop watching TV
to run an errand.
If you stop Pause Live TV function, then the TV programme
temporarily saved on the HDD will be deleted.
 Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV
input to suit the connections to this unit.
 Turn on this unit and press [ CH] to select the
channel.
 When you want to pause the TV programme
Press [].
Select
a function
and an item.
FUNCTION MENU
Recording
Tips
DELETE Navigator
HDD
10/10
Chantal Show
Previous
OK
RETURN
OPTION
HDD

BBC
You can access
selected function
easily.
Grouped Titles
VIDEO
11/10
Dolphins
MUSIC
Pause Live TV
2
Page 02/02
Select
PICTURE
LR
This icon indicates that
the Pause Live TV is
working.
Next
Previous
Next
Playback
S l t when
Select
h you wish
i h to
t playback
l
the contents. The
DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen or menu screen etc. will
be displayed.
 Video ( 20, 36)  DivX ( 38)  Picture ( 40)
 Music ( 39, 42)  Top Menu ( 20)  Menu ( 20)
Recording
S
l t when
h you wish
i h to
t perform
f
Select
manual timer
recording, or check the timer recording. The timer
recording list will be displayed. ( 30, 31)
Delete
Select
S
l t the
th title
titl or fil
file ttype you wish to delete. The
DELETE Navigator screen will be displayed.
 Video ( 23)  Picture ( 55)  Music ( 55)
Copy
Select
S
l t the
th copy method.
th d
 Video (HDD to DVD) ( 58)  Advanced Copy (
 Copy Music ( 64)
 Copy New Pictures ([EX89]) ( 63)
 When you want to resume playback
Press [] (PLAY).
– The programme is saved on the HDD in SP recording
mode ( 25) regardless of the recording mode and
the drive selected before starting saving.
– At least 1 hour up to 8 hours of TV programmes can
be temporarily saved on the HDD. (This may vary
depending on the HDD free space.)
Operations during Pause Live TV
Search
Press [, ]
Pause
Press [].
 Press [] (PLAY) to restart.
Quick View
Press and hold [] (PLAY/1.3).
 Press again to return to the normal speed.
Slowmotion
While paused, press [] or [].
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
 Press [] (PLAY) to restart play.
Stop
Pause Live
TV
 Press [].
 Press [, ] to select “Yes” and press
[OK].
Advanced Features
,  to select an item, then
Playback
USB
To pause the TV programme you are
watching—Pause Live TV
,  to select a function, then
HDD
Drive Select
Ch
Change
which
hi h drive
d i is
i used.
d
HDD
DVD
SD
Notes
59)
TV Guide
S
l t when
h you wish
i h to
t watch
t or record a programme.
Select
The TV Guide will be displayed. ( 19, 22)
Others
Select
S
l t and
d execute
t a function
f
ti other than those above,
such as recording or setting.
Playlists ( 51)
Flexible Rec ( 27)
DV Auto Rec ( 29) HDD Management ( 68)
DVD Management ( 68)
Card Management ( 68) Setup ( 70)
 When the Digital Teletext ( 46) is displayed, intended image may
not be recorded.
 The Pause Live TV function automatically stops when a timer
recording starts.
 The Pause Live TV function does not work
– when the clock is not set
– while recording
– while timer recording
– while EXT LINK recording, etc.
 You cannot change audio or subtitle during resume play.
 The first 30 minutes is deleted every 30 minutes after the HDD is full
or the saving lasts 8 hours.
 The Pause Live TV function stops automatically 24 hours after
started.
 “DVB Multi Audio” of on-screen menu cannot be switched during
Pause Live TV.
43
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 43
2009/04/27 11:45:41
Linked Operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”/Q Link)
You can enjoy linked operations with the TV and receiver
by using “VIERA Link” or Q Link.
What is VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”?
[VIERA\Link]
VIERA Link “HDAVI Control” is a convenient function that
offers linked operations of this unit, and a Panasonic TV
(VIERA) or receiver under “HDAVI Control”. You can use this
function by connecting the equipment with the HDMI cable.
See the operating instructions for connected equipment for
operational details.
 VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”, based on the control functions
provided by HDMI which is an industry standard known as HDMI
CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), is a unique function that
we have developed and added. As such, its operation with other
manufacturers’ equipment that supports HDMI CEC cannot be
guaranteed.
 This unit supports “HDAVI Control 4” function.
“HDAVI Control 4” is the newest standard (current as of December,
2008) for Panasonic’s HDAVI Control compatible equipment.
This standard is compatible with Panasonic’s conventional HDAVI
equipment.
 Please refer to individual manuals for other manufacturers’
equipment supporting VIERA Link function.
Preparation:
1. Connect this unit to your TV using an HDMI cable and a fully wired
21-pin Scart cable ( 12), or to your receiver using an HDMI cable
( 80).
2. Set “VIERA Link” to “On” ( 75). (The default setting is “On”.)
3. Set the “HDAVI Control” operations on the connected equipment
(e.g., TV).
 Set the input channel on VIERA to suit the terminal to be
used as “HDAVI Control”.
4. Turn on all “HDAVI Control” compatible equipment and select
this unit’s input channel on the connected TV so that the “HDAVI
Control” function works properly.
Also when the connection or settings are changed, repeat this
procedure.
What is Q Link?
[Q\Link]
Q Link is a convenient function that offers linked operations of this
unit and a Panasonic TV. You can use this function by connecting
the equipment with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable.
Preparation:
 Connect this unit to your TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable
( 10, 11).
(When the TV is on) Easy playback
[VIERA]Link] [Q]Link]
When the TV is on and the following operations are
performed, the TV’s input will automatically switch
to HDMI input mode ([VIERA\Link]) or AV input mode
([Q\Link]) and the TV displays the corresponding
action.
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few
seconds.)
Press [FUNCTION MENU]1, [] (PLAY)2, [DIRECT
NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [PROG/CHECK] etc.
(When the TV is off) Power on link
[VIERA]Link] [Q]Link]
When the TV is off and the following operations are
performed, the TV will automatically turn on and
displays the corresponding action.
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few
seconds.)
Press [FUNCTION MENU]1, [] (PLAY)2, [DIRECT
NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [PROG/CHECK] etc.
 [DVD-V] [CD] [VCD] SVCD and MP3/WMA
The TV is automatically turned on when you insert the discs.
Power off link [VIERA]Link] [Q]Link]
When you set the TV to standby mode, the unit is
also automatically set to standby mode. The unit
is automatically set to standby mode even if the
FUNCTION MENU etc. is displayed, during playback
or when the unit is set to a timer recording.
Even if the TV is turned off, the unit will not be turned off at the
same time when recording, copying, finalising etc.
 When this unit is connected to an “HDAVI Control” compatible
Panasonic receiver with an HDMI cable, the receiver will also turn
off.
About the Standby Power Save function
[VIERA]Link]3
Even with “Power Save” set to “Off” ( 76) (Quick Start mode),
this unit turns to “Power Save” states ( 13) when Power off link
works, so it is possible to reduce the power consumption while this
unit is in standby mode.
 “Standby Power Save” setting is required to be activated on the
TV.
 When turning this unit on or off without using Power off link
function, this unit will not turn to “Power Save” states.
Notes
Direct TV Recording [VIERA]Link]
The following systems from other manufacturers have similar function
to Q Link from Panasonic.
For details, refer to your television’s operating instructions or consult
your dealer.
 Q Link (registered trademark of Panasonic)
 DATA LOGIC (registered trademark of Metz)
 Easy Link (registered trademark of Philips)
 Megalogic (registered trademark of Grundig)
 SMARTLINK (registered trademark of Sony)
This function allows you to immediately start recording
the programme that you are viewing on the TV.
4
[Q]Link]
 Depending on the TV type connected with this unit, this function
may not work.
 The titles are recorded to the HDD.
 When the Digital Teletext ( 46) is displayed, intended image
may not be recorded.
 If you switch TV channels while using Direct TV recording, the
Direct TV recording stops.
 When “EXT-L” lights on the unit’s display ( 28), Direct TV
recording is unavailable.
To stop recording
Press [].
1
This button is available only when this unit is on.
When this button is pressed, the playback image is not immediately
displayed on the screen and it may not be possible to watch the
contents from where playback started.
In this case, press [] or [] to go back to where playback
started.
3
This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI
Control 4”.
4
This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI
Control 3” or later.
2
Notes
 These functions may not work normally depending on the equipment
condition.
 About “HDAVI Control” function, read the manual of the connected
equipment (e.g., TV) too.
44
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 44
2009/04/27 11:45:42
Easy control only with VIERA remote
control
If you connect this unit to the TV that supports “HDAVI Control
2” or later with an HDMI cable, you can enjoy using more
convenient functions.
You can operate this unit using buttons on the TV remote
control.
The buttons that you can use for this unit vary depending on
the TV. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the TV.
Use the remote control supplied with this unit if you cannot
operate this unit using buttons on the TV remote control.
The operation of this unit may be interrupted when you press
incompatible buttons on the TV remote control.
The TV displays the TV tuner’s picture when the linked
operation is finished.
Using the FUNCTION MENU to operate this
unit [VIERA]Link]
This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI
Control 2” or later.
 Display this unit’s “FUNCTION MENU” using the TV
remote control.

 If this unit is turned off, this unit will turn on automatically.
 About the FUNCTION MENU Display ( 43, 74)
 Select the item you want to operate with the TV remote
control, then press [OK].
Pause live TV programme [VIERA]Link]
This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI
Control 3” or later.
You can pause the TV programme you are watching and
resume later by temporarily saving it on the HDD. This is useful
when you have to briefly stop watching TV to run an errand.
If you stop the Pause Live TV function, then the TV programme
temporarily saved on the HDD will be deleted.
 When you want to pause the TV programme
Turn on the “Pause Live TV” function using the TV remote
control.
 This unit turns on automatically.
 When you want to resume
Display the Control Panel ( right), then press [OK].
 The TV programme resumes.
Refer to “Notes” on page 43, “To pause the TV programme you
are watching—Pause Live TV”.
Tips
To stop Pause Live TV
1 Press [] while the Control Panel is displayed.
2 Press [, ] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
Using the OPTION menu window to operate
this unit [VIERA]Link]
This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI
Control 2” or later.
By using the TV remote control, you can play discs using the
“Control Panel” ( below) and display the Top Menu for DVDVideo.
Control Panel
 Press [OPTION].
 You cannot use the OPTION menu while the Top
Menu for DVD-Video is displayed or while DVDVideo is being copied.
FUNCTION MENU
Top Menu
Menu
Drive Select
OK
 Select an item, then press [OK].
RETURN
Switch to TV
Displayed when watching with the
tuner of this unit. It will return to the
TV picture.
Control Panel
Control Panel is displayed.
( below)
FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
( left)
Top Menu is displayed. ( 20)
Menu is displayed. ( 20)
Select the HDD, DVD or SD drive.
FUNCTION
MENU
Top Menu [DVD-V]
Menu [DVD-V]
Drive Select
Rotate RIGHT/
Rotate LEFT
(JPEG)
Zoom in/Zoom out
(JPEG)
Audio Description
Rotate the still pictures. (
41)
Advanced Features
Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive
are applicable to the DMR-EX89 model only.
Enlarge or shrink the still picture.
( 41)
Audio Description screen is
displayed. ( 46)
Using the Control Panel
Using the “Control Panel”, you can operate search backward,
search forward, stop, etc, with the TV remote control.
Select “Control Panel”, then press [OK] in step  of “Using the
OPTION menu window to operate this unit” ( above).
The Control Panel is displayed
Control Panel
( right)
Pause
 While playing a title or DVD-Video,
Exit
etc.
Search
Search
– []: Pause, []:Stop,
Play
[]: Search backward,
Stop
[]:Search forward, [OK]: Play,
[EXIT]: Exit the Control Panel
 While playing still pictures
– []: Stop, []:View previous picture,
[]: View next picture, [EXIT]: Exit the Control Panel
 When you want to leave the TV on and set only this unit
to standby mode
Press [] on this unit’s remote control, then set to standby
mode.
 When not using “HDAVI Control”
Set “VIERA Link” in the Setup menu to “Off” ( 75).
45
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 45
2009/04/27 11:45:42
Information Messages
Digital Channel Information
Listening to the Audio Description
You can display the information about programmes
(programme name, broadcast time, etc.).
When “AD” appears in digital channel information
With the unit stopped
STATUS
This function can aid visually-impaired viewers by adding an
audio track to describe events on-screen.
OPTION
to show the screen information.
to show the OPTION menu.
,  to select “Audio
Description”, then OK
When the digital channel information is being
displayed
– Press [STATUS ] again and detailed information
will be displayed (only when “info ” is displayed).
Status message ( 47)
– Audio Description screen appears.
,  to select “Audio Description”.
RETURN
,  to select “Auto”, then
HDD
1: 07 SP
1 DVB
BBC ONE Wales

“info
1 BBC ONE Wales
Wales today
17:00 – 17:15
Notes
STATUS
17:11 All Channels
Change Category
info
NOW
Multi Audio
TXT
Subtitle
STATUS
”
Tips
1 BBC ONE Wales
Wales today
17:00 - 17:15
17:11 All Channels
Exit info
NOW
In the 1970’s, John Belshi, working with National Lampoon, mol with Dan
Aykuoyd, then a host of a children’s tv program, and owner of a
speakeasy called the “505 Club”. Dan from Toronto, put on a record
called Straight Up. by the Downchild Blues Band.
Multi Audio
Digital channel information
Programme name
and Broadcast
time
Channel and
Station Name
TXT
Subtitle
Detailed information
Signal Quality Category
( 47)
1 BBC ONE Wales No Signal 19:03 All Channels
Change Category
BBC News
19:00 - 19:30
info
NOW
Encrypted AD Multi Audio
TXT
Subtitle
Encrypted
During scrambled broadcasting
(You cannot watch the broadcast).
AD
Audio Description service may be available.
Multi Audio Programme is broadcast in multi-channel sound
( 67, DVB Multi Audio).
To select audio language
( 71, DVB Preferred Multi Audio)
TXT
Digital Teletext may be available.
Subtitle
Subtitle may be available.
e.g.,
Even with programmes with “AD”,
1 BBC ONE Wales
17:11 All Channels
Wales today
“Multi Audio”, “TXT” and “Subtitle”
17:00 - 17:15
Exit info
NOW
indications, you may not be able to
[AD,S]
use these services. To confirm the
Subtitle
AD
availability of these services, refer to

the indications in the detailed information too.

These indications are not displayed properly unless the information
sent from broadcast stations is correct.
Tips
To switch information of the current programme and the next
programme
Press [, ].
 NOW: current programme
 NEXT: next programme
To select the information of another channel
Press [, ].
 Press [OK] to watch the selected channel.
To change the length of time digital channel information is
displayed for
( 74, On-Screen Messages)
Notes
46
 Programmes are recorded with Audio Description when you record
them with “Audio Description” set to “Auto”.
 Every time you change the channel, digital channel
information appears automatically. They disappear again after
a short time.
 If you record a digital radio broadcast or a digital broadcast
that is not being received correctly, digital channel information
is also recorded and will remain visible during playback.
 To turn off the Audio Description
In the step  above, press [, ] to select “Off”, then press
[RETURN ].
 To change the volume
In the step  above, press [, ] to select “Volume” and press
[, ] to set the volume, then press [RETURN ].
 You can switch the Audio Description and change its volume during
recording and timer recording.
Showing the Digital Teletext
When “TXT” appears in digital channel information
TEXT
to show the Digital Teletext.
– Press again to hide.
Notes
 During recording the Digital Teletext function is not possible.
 When subtitle is on or the digital channel information is displayed, the
Digital Teletext function does not work.
Tips
To view another page of Digital Teletext
Press [, , , ] to select another page, then press [OK].
 You can also use the numbered buttons to select another page.
Quickly access to certain topic areas and navigation
Use colour buttons according to on-screen instructions.
Showing Subtitles
When “Subtitle” appears in digital channel information
STTL
to show subtitles.
– Press again to hide.
Notes
 Programmes are recorded with subtitles when you record them with
the subtitles setting set to “Subtitles On”.
 You cannot switch subtitles during timer recording.
Tips
To select subtitle language (
71, DVB Preferred Subtitles)
Changing the Category
You can select one of your favourite channels by changing
the category [such as Free Channels, Radio and Registered
Favourites ( 70)].
When digital channel information is displayed
(Blue)
to change the category.
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 46
2009/04/27 11:45:42
Entering Text
No Signal
No Service
The digital broadcast signal is not
being received.
No broadcasts are currently available.
You can give names to recorded titles, etc.
Also, you can search for desired programmes on GUIDE
Plus+ list by entering key words or the programme
name. (Free Word Search, Find Titles) ( 35)
When viewing the “Enter Name” screen etc.
If “No Signal” is displayed, check the following;
Enter Name
_
 Check that the aerial is correctly positioned.
 Check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly
broadcasting.
Top Menu Preview
Status Messages
Current media
Shows current recording or play status.
DVD REC
Recording drive/Copy progress indicator
 T1
0:05.14 XP
 T2
DVD REC
Elapsed recording
time and recording mode
Elapsed play time
and recording mode
When using Pause Live TV
The time when the picture currently displayed was
broadcasted
Play
15:05:13
Live
15:10:46
Current time
No Display
New Channel Message
When a new DVB channel is added this unit will
be informed automatically. Then the confirmation
message appears. If you select “Yes” on the display,
Auto-Setup starts (all channel settings are deleted.
The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.).
New Channel
A new DVB Channel has been found.
Start DVB Auto-Setup?
Selecting DVB Auto-Setup will delete
all Timer Programmes.
Yes
RETURN
Tips
The display/hide setting can be changed (
a
b
c
F
d
e
f
h
i
k
m n
l
H
I
g
K
L
j

Add to List
6 M N
O

Name List
7 P
8 T
Q
R
U
V
9 W X
0 . ,
Y
Z
?
!
S
9
/
0
e. g., “Enter
Name” screen
%
$
&
@
o
[
]
_
p
q
r
s
(
t
u
v
{
}
)
-
w
x
"
'
y
:
z
;
\
`
|
^
Space
RETURN
To delete a character
Press [] on a character in the name field.
To cancel in the middle
Press [RETURN ].
 Characters will not be saved.
STOP
when you’ve finished
entering text.
Tips
 To add a name to the list
You can add frequently used names and recall them later.
Maximum number of added names: 20
Maximum number of characters per name: 44
After entering the name (step )
1. Press [, , , ] to select “Add to List”, then press
[OK].
You can also press [] to select “Add to List”.
2. Press [, ] to select “Add”, then press [OK].
Press [RETURN ] to cancel.
 To recall an added name
1. Press [, , , ] to select “Name List”, then press
[OK].
You can also press [] to select “Name List”.
2. Press [, , , ] to select the name to be recalled,
then press [OK].
 To delete an added name
1. Press [, , , ] to select “Name List”, then press
[OK].
You can also press [] to select “Name List”.
2. Press [, , , ] to select the name to be deleted.
3. Press [OPTION] to show “Delete Name”, then press
[OK].
4. Press [, ] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].
5. Press [RETURN ].
Notes
No
OK
C
8
To enter a space
Press [DELETE ], then press [OK].
HDD
REC
1 DVB
BBC ONE Wales
0:00.10 XP
7
Using the numbered buttons to enter characters
e.g.: entering the letter “R”
1. Press [7] to move to the 7th row.
2. Press [7] twice to highlight “R”.
3. Press [OK].
The current date and time
13:50 XP
E
6
– Repeat this step to enter other characters.
Remaining recording time and recording mode
(e.g.: “1:45 SP” indicates 1 hour and 45 minutes
in SP mode)
• Disc remaining time may slightly differ between
different models.
Remain
B
3 D
5
, , ,  to select a
character, then OK
Channel information
18:53:50 11/10
2 A
4
5 J
OK
Keep pressing to cycle through
available displays.
HDD
REC
1 DVB
BBC ONE Wales
3
4 G
SELECT
During playback and/or recording
STATUS
2
 Delete
 Set
The following messages and displays appear to let
you know what operations are being performed and
the status of the unit.
1 1
Advanced Features
Signal Quality
74).
If you enter a long name, only part
of it is shown in the Top Menu after
finalisation ( 69). When entering a
title name, the name that will appear
in the Top Menu can be previewed in
“Top Menu Preview” window.
Enter Name
_
Chapter
1_
Top Menu Preview
1 1
Chapter 1
2 A
3 D
4 G
 Delete
5 J
47
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 47
2009/04/27 11:45:42
Titles—Editing
[HDD] [RAM]
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] (You can not edit finalised discs.)
[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
You can edit titles on the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen:
deleting unwanted parts of titles such as commercials,
changing Thumbnail, dividing and deleting titles, etc.
Tips
 Maximum numbers of titles on a disc
[HDD]
499
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
99
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
49
Accessing the Title View
Preparation:
 [RAM] Release protection (disc, cartridge
Protection).
68, Setting
[HDD] [RAM] When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the
“Red” button to select “VIDEO”.
 Press [, , , ] to select a title.
– Multiple editing ( below, Tips)
 Press [OPTION] to display the menu list.
 To view more options.
– Press [, ] to select “Edit”, then press [OK].
 Items that cannot be selected are grey.
Partial Delete
Properties
Change Thumbnail
Edit
Divide Title
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Use to delete unneeded titles.
Important: Once deleted, contents cannot be recovered.
Perform steps − of “Accessing the Title View” (
left).
 Press [, ] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].
 Press [] to select “Delete”, then press [OK] to
Notes
 [HDD] [RAM] Deleting an item increases the available disc
space by the amount of space taken by the item deleted.
 [-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] Available disc space does not
increase after deletion.
 [-RW‹V›] [+RW] Available disc space increases when you
delete the last title (the recording space may increase
slightly when other titles are deleted).
 Available disc space may not increase after deleting a
short title.
 [HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] To recover total disc space, the
disc needs to be formatted. ( 68)
Properties
Enter Title Name
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
Delete
confirm.
 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.
 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Delete
Title Operations
Refer to “Title
Operations”
( right).
Searching using programme
information of titles recorded
Release Grouping
to the HDD ( 35)
Chapter View
To edit the group of titles [HDD]
Table Display
( 36)
All Titles
Switching the DIRECT
PICTURE/MUSIC
NAVIGATOR appearance ( 36)
If you select “Chapter View” ( 50)
TV Guide Explorer
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Title information is shown (e.g., date, time)
Perform steps − of “Accessing the Title View” ( left).
 Press [, ] to select “Properties”, then press
[OK].
Create Group
Delete
Properties
Properties
Football
Edit
TV Guide Explorer
Create Group
No.
Date
Channel
001
Time18:07
12/11/2006 SUN Rec time2:15(SP)
T5
Release Grouping
OK
RETURN
Chapter View
Table Display
Notes
 You cannot edit during recording or copying, etc.
 [+R] [+R]DL] Management information is recorded in
unused sections when you edit discs. The available
space on these discs decreases each time you edit their
contents.
We recommend that you edit on the HDD and then copy
to discs.
Tips
To exit the menu screens
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Enter Title Name
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can give a name for the title.
Perform steps − of “Accessing the Title View” (
left).
 Press [, ] to select “Enter Title Name”, then
press [OK].
Entering Text ( 47)
– [HDD] Even if the group name is changed, the title
names in the group will not be changed.
To view other pages
Press [, , , ] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then
press [OK].
– You can also press [, ] to view other pages.
Multiple editing
(Only Delete, Set up Protection, Cancel Protection)
Select with [, , , ], then press []. (Repeat.)
– A check mark appears. Press [] again to cancel.
48
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 48
2009/04/27 11:45:42
Change Thumbnail
Set up Protection/Cancel Protection
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Changes the thumbnail picture shown in the Title View screen.
[HDD] [RAM] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Use to prevent accidental erasure of titles.
Perform steps − of “Accessing the Title View” (
Perform steps − of “Accessing the Title View” (
48).
press [OK].
“Cancel Protection”, then press [OK].
 Press [] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
Enter Title Name
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
The lock symbol appears
when the title is protected.
007
48).
 Press [,] to select “Change Thumbnail”, then
 Press [,] to select “Set up Protection” or
All Titles
008
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Change Thumbnail
HDD
VIDEO

008
Set up Protection
Change
Cancel Protection
Finish
Partial Delete
BBC 0 27/10 MON
BBC 0 27/10
0:00.01
Change Thumbnail
Change
- -:- -.- -
Divide Title
--
--
Start play and select the image
of a thumbnail.
OK
RETURN
Partial Delete
[HDD] [RAM]
Use to remove unwanted parts of titles, such as commercials.
Important: Once deleted, the parts cannot be recovered.
Perform steps − of “Accessing the Title View” (
48).
 Press [,] to select “Partial Delete”, then press
[OK].
– For quicker editing ( below, Tips)
– To change the thumbnail:
Restart play and press [, ] to select “Change”, then
press [OK] at the point you want to use as the thumbnail.
 Press [, ] to select “Finish”, then press [OK].
Divide Title
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Partial Delete
HDD
008
Set up Protection
PLAY
VIDEO
Start
End
Cancel Protection
Next
Partial Delete
Finish
0:43.21
Change Thumbnail
Divide Title
Start
End
- -:- -.- -
- -:- -.- -
OK
RETURN
 Press [OK] to set the “Start” point and then press
[OK] again to set the “End” point of the section you
want to erase.
– For quicker editing ( below, Tips)
– To delete multiple sections:
Press [,] to select “Next”, and repeat this step.
 Press [,] to select “Finish”, then press [OK].
 Press [] to select “Delete”, then press [OK] to
confirm.
Notes
 You may not be able to specify start and end points within
3 seconds of each other.
 Available disc space may not increase after erasing short
parts of titles.
[HDD] [RAM]
You can divide a title into two.
Once divided, titles cannot be recombined.
Perform steps − of “Accessing the Title View” (
48).
 Press [, ] to select “Divide Title”, then press
[OK].
Enter Title Name
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Divide Title
HDD
VIDEO
PLAY
008
Set up Protection
Preview
Divide
Cancel Protection
Finish
Partial Delete
0:00.00
Change Thumbnail
Divide
- -:- -.- -
Divide Title
OK
RETURN
 Press [OK] at the point you want to divide.
– For quicker editing ( below, Tips)
– Selecting “Preview”, then pressing [OK] plays the title
from 10 seconds prior, to 10 seconds after the division
point.
– To change the point to divide at:
Press [, ] to select “Divide”, then press
[] (PLAY) to bring to the point where you want to
divide, then press [OK].
 Press [, ] to select “Finish”, then press [OK].
 Press [] to select “Divide”, then press [OK].
– The title is divided at that point.
Advanced Editing
Enter Title Name
 Press [] (PLAY) to start play.
 Press [OK] at the point you want to use as the thumbnail.
Notes
 Divided titles retain the name of the original.
 A short amount of video and audio just before and after
the division point get cut out.
 You cannot divide a title when the resulting parts are too
short.
 [HDD] Divided titles form a group of titles.
Tips
For quicker editing
 Use Search ( 37) or Time Slip ( 37) to find the desired point.
 To skip to the start or end of a title/chapter press [] (start) or [] (end).
 For better precision, use Slow-motion ( 37) and Frame-by-Frame ( 37).
49
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 49
2009/04/27 11:45:43
Chapters—Creating, Editing
[HDD] [RAM]
When creating chapters in your favourite scenes, you can
easily reach the head of scene using [,] (SKIP) or play
on Chapter View.
Tips
 Chapter
Each section between the division points becomes a
chapter.
Title
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Tips
To exit the menu screens
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
To view other pages
Press [, , , ] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then
press [OK].
– You can also press [, ] to view other pages.
Multiple editing
(Only Delete Chapter)
Select with [, , , ], then press []. (Repeat.)
– A check mark appears. Press [] again to cancel.
 [HDD] [RAM]: You can change the order of chapters and
create a playlist ( 51).
Chapter Operations
“Chapter Creation” in the Setup menu ( 72)
“Automatic”:
Detects changes (special mute points like the start and the
end of the programme) in the scene during recording and
sets chapter start points on them automatically.
 Depending on the programme to be recorded or the
Recording Mode, the chapter start points may not be
created correctly.
“5 minutes”:
Sets chapter start points automatically during recording at
approximately 5-minute interval.
Delete Chapter
You can delete the chapters for each title.
Important: Once deleted, recorded contents cannot be
recovered.
Perform steps −
of “Accessing the Chapter View” (
left).
 Press [, ] to select “Delete Chapter”, then press
[OK].
 Press [] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].
Create Chapter
 Maximum numbers of chapters on a disc
[HDD]: Approx. 1000 per title
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]: Approx. 1000
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]: Approx. 254
You can divide a title into multiple chapters.
Perform steps −
of “Accessing the Chapter View” (
left).
 Press [, ] to select “Create Chapter”, then press
[OK].
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Create Chapter
HDD
Delete Chapter
Accessing the Chapter View
008
Create
Create Chapter
Combine Chapters
 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.
 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[HDD] [RAM] When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the
“Red” button to select “VIDEO”.
 Press [, , , ] to select a title.
Delete
Properties
menu.
 Press [, ] to select “Chapter View” Edit
TV Guide Explorer
then press [OK].
Create Group
 Press [, , , ] to select a
Release Grouping
chapter.
Chapter View
– Multiple editing ( right, Tips)
Table Display
To play
Press [OK].
To edit
Press [OPTION] to display the menu list.
Delete Chapter
Create Chapter
Combine Chapters
Finish
0:43.21
Title View
Allows viewing and editing chapters individually.
 Press [OPTION] to display the OPTION
VIDEO
PLAY
OK
RETURN
 Press [OK] at the point you want to divide.
– For quicker editing ( 49, Tips)
– Repeat this step to create additional chapters.
 Press [, ] to select “Finish”, then press [OK].
Notes
 A short portion of the title just after the creation point may
be lost.
Combine Chapters
You can combine the divided chapters.
Perform steps −
of “Accessing the Chapter View” (
left).
 Press [, ] to select “Combine Chapters”, then
Refer to “Chapter
Operations” ( right).
Title View
press [OK].
 Press [] to select “Combine”, then press [OK].
– The selected chapter gets combined with the next
chapter.
You can go back to the Title View.
50
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 50
2009/04/27 11:45:43
Creating, Editing and Playing Playlists
[HDD] [RAM]
[-RW‹VR›] (play only)
You can create playlists by grouping your favourite scenes
(chapters) from the recorded titles and edit the created
playlists.
[HDD] [RAM]
A playlist is a compilation of your favourite chapters as
shown in the chart below.
Title
Title
Chapter
Playlist
Copying (
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
left)
Preparation:
 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the
recorded title to be edited.
 [RAM] Release protection (disc, cartridge
68, Setting
Protection).
With the unit stopped
 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
 Press [, ] to select “Others”, then press [OK].
 Press [, ] to select “Playlists”, then press [OK].
FUNCTION MENU
FUNCTION MENU
Remain 30:00 SP
Playback
Recording
Delete
Copy
Remain 30:00 SP
HDD
Playback
Playlists
Flexible Rec
DV Auto Rec
HDD Management
Setup
Recording
Delete
Copy
TV Guide
TV Guide
Others
Drive Select
Others
Drive Select
OK
Playlists
Flexible Rec
DV Auto Rec
HDD Management
Setup
OK
RETURN
 Press [RETURN ] to finish and exit the screen.
Notes
 Playlists cannot be created while recording or copying.
 You are allowed a maximum of 99 playlists, with
approximately 1000 chapters per playlist.
Accessing the Playlist View
HDD
[].
– Press [OK] to select all the chapters in the title, then
skip to step .
 Press [, ] to select the source chapter you want
to add to a playlist, then press [OK].
– Press [] to cancel.
– Press [OPTION] to select “Create Chapter”, then
press [OK] if you want to create a new chapter in the
source title ( 50).
 Press [, ] to select the position to insert the
chapter, then press [OK].
– Press [] repeatedly to return to step , if you want
to add additional source titles.
Chapters are registered to the playlist. Repeat steps  and 
to add other chapters.
56) a playlist will create a title.
 Editing playlists doesn’t modify titles.
 Playlists are not recorded separately so this doesn’t use much
capacity.
4c
Perform steps − 4b of “Accessing the Playlist View”. (
Editing Playlists/Chapters
Delete
[HDD] [RAM]
Use to delete unneeded playlists.
Advanced Editing
Chapter
4b
[HDD] [RAM]
 Press [, ] to select the source title, then press
Tips
4a
Creating Playlists
Important: Once deleted, playlists contents cannot be
recovered (titles are not affected).
Perform steps − 4c of “Accessing the Playlist View”. (
left)
 Press [, ] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].
 Press [] to select “Delete”, then press [OK] to
confirm.
RETURN
To play
Press [, , , ] to select the playlist to play,
then press [OK].
To create
Press [, , , ] to select “Create”, then press
[OK] ( right, Creating Playlists).
To edit
Press [, , , ] to select the playlist, then press
[OPTION].
– Multiple editing ( 52, Tips in “Edit”)
Enter Name
Properties
Change Thumbnail
Refer to “Editing
Playlists/Chapters”
( right).
Edit
Properties
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›]
Playlist information (e.g., length and date) is shown.
Perform steps − 4c of “Accessing the Playlist View”. (
left)
[OK].
Tips
To exit the screen
Press [OK].
Chapter View
If you select “Chapter View” (
To delete during play
1. Press [DELETE ]. A confirmation message displays.
2. Press [] to select “Delete”, then press [OK] to confirm.
 Press [, ] to select “Properties”, then press
Create
Copy
Delete
Tips
52)
51
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 51
2009/04/27 11:45:43
Creating, Editing and Playing Playlists
Edit
Chapter Operations
[HDD] [RAM]
You can create and copy playlists, and change the thumbnail.
Perform steps − 4c of “Accessing the Playlist View” (
51).
 Press [, ] to select “Edit”, then press [OK].
 Press [, ] to select desired operation from
Add
Chapter
 Press [, ] to select “Add Chapter”,
then press [OK].
( 51, Creating Playlists)
Move
Chapter
 Press [, ] to select “Move Chapter”,
then press [OK].
 Press [, , , ] to select the position
to insert the chapter, then press [OK].
the menu displayed location, then press [OK]
( below).
Create
Playlists
HDD
 Press [, ] to select “Create”, then
press [OK].
( 51, Creating Playlists)
Copy
001
 Press [, ] to select “Enter Name”, then
press [OK].
 Enter a name for the playlist.
( 47, Entering Text).
Change
Thumbnail
 Press [, ] to select “Change
Thumbnail”, then press [OK].
 Press [] (PLAY). Use Time Slip ( 37),
Slow-motion ( 37), Frame-by-Frame
( 37), or Search ( 37) to find the
desired point.
 Press [OK] at the image you wish you use
for your thumbnail.
 Press [, ] to select “Finish”, then press
[OK].
– The thumbnail picture is now changed.
Tips
002
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
0:19.36
0:10.24
 Press [, ] to select “Copy”, then press
[OK].
 Press [] to select “Copy”, then press
[OK].
Enter
Name
Move Chapter
01 12/10 SUN 0:11
Previous
Page 01/01
Next
OK
RETURN
Create
Chapter
 Press [, ] to select “Create Chapter”,
then press [OK].
 Press [] (PLAY). Use Time Slip ( 37),
Slow-motion ( 37), Frame-by-Frame
( 37), or Search ( 37) to find the
desired point.
 Press [OK] at the point you want to divide.
 Press [, ] to select “Finish”, then press
[OK].
Combine
Chapters
 Press [, ] to select “Combine
Chapters”, then press [OK].
 Press [] to select “Combine”, then press
[OK].
– The selected chapter gets combined
with the next chapter.
Delete
Chapter
 Press [, ] to select “Delete Chapter”,
then press [OK].
 Press [] to select “Delete”, then press
[OK].
To exit the menu screens
Press [EXIT].
To view other pages
Press [, , , ] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then
press [OK].
– You can also press [, ] to view other pages.
Tips
Multiple editing
(Only Delete, Copy)
Select with [, , , ], then press []. (Repeat.)
– A check mark appears. Press [] again to cancel.
To view other pages
Press [, , , ] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then
press [OK].
– You can also press [, ] to view other pages.
Chapter View
[HDD] [RAM]
You can add, move, divide, combine or delete chapters in the
playlist.
Perform steps − 4c of “Accessing the Playlist View” ( 51).
 Press [, ] to select “Chapter View”, then press
[OK].
 Press [, , , ] to select a chapter.
– Multiple editing ( right, Tips)
To play
Press [OK].
To edit
Press [OPTION] to display the menu list.
To exit the menu screens
Press [EXIT].
Multiple editing
(Only Delete Chapter)
Select with [, , , ], then press []. (Repeat.)
– A check mark appears. Press [] again to cancel.
For quicker editing
– To skip to the start or end of a playlist/chapter, press
[] (start) or [] (end).
Add Chapter
Move Chapter
Create Chapter
Combine Chapters
Refer to “Chapter Operations”
( right)
Delete Chapter
52
Playlist View
You can go back to the Playlist View.
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 52
2009/04/27 11:45:43
Still Pictures and Music—Editing
Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive
are applicable to the DMR-EX89 model only.
Accessing the Album (still picture)/Picture
View
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
[-R] (JPEG)
You can edit pictures and albums.
e.g., [HDD] Editing an album
Refer to “Slideshow” (
41)
Slideshow Setting
Delete Album
Change Date
Edit Album
Set up Protection
Copy to DVD
Cancel Protection
Refer to “Album
(still picture)/
Picture Operations”
( right)
VIDEO/MUSIC
e.g., [HDD] Editing a still picture
Delete Picture
Properties
Change Date
Refer to “Album (still picture)/
Picture Operations” ( right).
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
Album View
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
Perform steps − of “Accessing the Album (still picture)/
Picture View” ( left).
 Press [, ] to select “Add Pictures” or “Create
You can go back to the Album View.
Notes
 You cannot edit still pictures recorded on DVD-R DL,
CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.
 You cannot edit still pictures recorded on finalized DVD-R.
Tips
To view other pages
Press [, , , ] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then
press [OK].
– You can also press [, ] to view other pages.
Multiple editing
[Only Delete Album, Delete Picture, Change Date (Only
when the “Picture (JPEG) View” screen is displayed), Set up
Protection, Cancel Protection, Copy to DVD, Copy to HDD]
Select with [, , , ], then press []. (Repeat.)
– A check mark appears. Press [] again to cancel.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the menu screens
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
 Press [] to select “Start” or “Yes”, then press
[OK].
 Press [, , , ] to select the album containing
picture to add, then press [OK].
 Press [, ] to select “Select pictures to copy” or
“Copy all pictures”, then press [OK].
 If “Select pictures to copy” is selected
Press [, , , ] to select the picture, then press
[OK].
 If “Copy all pictures” is selected
All the still pictures in the album will be copied.
 Press [] to select “No” to finish copying, then
press [OK].
– If you want to continue copying, select “Yes”, then
repeat steps –.
Only when you select “Create Album”
 Press [, ] to select “Yes” or “No”, then press
[OK].
 If “Yes” is selected
You can give a name for the album ( 47, Entering
Text).
 If “No” is selected
The album name is automatically given.
Advanced Editing
[HDD] [RAM] When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the
“Green” button to select “PICTURE”.
Editing an album:
2 Press [, , , ] to select the album.
– Multiple editing ( below, Tips)
– When you want to create an album using “Create
Album”, press [OPTION] without selecting album.
Editing a still picture:
2 1. Press [, , , ] to select the album which
contains the still picture to edit, then press [OK].
2. Press [, , , ] to select the still picture.
– Multiple editing ( below, Tips)
 Press [OPTION] to display the menu list.
To view more options
Press [, ] to select “Edit Album”, then press [OK].
 Items that cannot be selected are grey.
Create Album
 Timer recordings do not start when performing “Change
Date”, “Copy to DVD”, “Copy to HDD”, “Add Pictures” or
“Create Album”.
Album”, then press [OK].
 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Add Pictures
Notes
Add Pictures/Create Album
Preparation:
 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or SD
drive.
 [RAM]] [SD] Release protection (disc, cartridge, card
68,
Setting Protection)
Start Slideshow
Album (still picture)/Picture Operations
Notes
 [RAM] [SD] “Add Pictures” is available only for the folders
conforming to DCF.
Delete Album/Delete Picture
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
[-R] (JPEG)
Important: Once deleted, contents cannot be recovered.
 When deleting an album, non-picture files in the album will
also be deleted. (This does not apply to subordinate folders
in the album.)
 [-R] Available space does not increase even after pictures are
deleted.
Perform steps − of “Accessing the Album (still picture)/
Picture View” ( left).
 Press [, ] to select “Delete Album” or “Delete
Picture”, then press [OK].
 Press [] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].
53
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 53
2009/04/27 11:45:43
Still Pictures and Music—Editing
Enter Album Name
Copy to DVD/Copy to HDD
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
Perform steps − of “Accessing the Album (still picture)/
Picture View” ( 53).
 Press [, ] to select “Enter Album Name”, then
press [OK].
– You can give a name for the album (
Text).
47, Entering
Notes
 Album names entered using this unit may not be
displayed on other equipment.
Change Date
[HDD] [RAM]
You can change the date of this picture.
Perform steps − of “Accessing the Album (still picture)/
Picture View” ( 53).
 Press [, ] to select “Change Date”, then press
[OK].
 Press [, ] to select the item, then press [, ]
to change.
 Press [OK].
Set up Protection/Cancel Protection
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
Set protection to prevent pictures from being accidentally
deleted.
[HDD] [RAM]
Perform steps − of “Accessing the Album (still picture)/
Picture View” ( 53).
 Press [, ] to select “Copy to DVD” or “Copy to
HDD”, then press [OK].

For copy to DVD-RAM or HDD
Press [, ] to select “Start”, then press [OK].
For copy to DVD-R
Press [, ] to select “Copy & Finalise” or “Copy
Only”, then press [OK].
Notes
 Use blank discs or unfinalized discs on which JPEG
images are recorded with this unit.
Properties
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R\DL] [CD] [USB] [SD]
Information (e.g., image size and file size) is shown.
Perform steps − of “Accessing the Album (still picture)/
Picture View” ( 53).
 Press [, ] to select “Properties”, then press
[OK].
To exit the Properties screen, press [OK].
Perform steps − of “Accessing the Album (still picture)/
Picture View” ( 53).
 Press [, ] to select “Set up Protection” or
“Cancel Protection”, then press [OK].
 Press [] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
– The lock symbol “ ” appears when the still picture or
album is protected.
Notes
 Even if you set protection using this unit, album may be
deleted by other equipment.
54
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 54
2009/04/27 11:45:44
Accessing the Album and Track View
[HDD]
Preparation:
 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
– When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow”
button to select “MUSIC”.
 Editing an album
Press [, ] to select the album, then press
[OPTION].
Editing a track
1.Press [, ] to select the album, then press [OK].
2.Press [, ] to select the track, then press
[OPTION].
 Press [, ] to select the operation, then press
[OK].
Deleting still pictures and music using
DELETE Navigator
Preparation:
 [RAM] [SD] Release protection (disc, cartridge, card
Setting Protection)
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
[-R] (JPEG)
Important: Once deleted, contents cannot be recovered.
 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or
SD drive.
 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
 Press [, ] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].
 Press [, ] to select “Picture” or “Music”, then
press [OK].
FUNCTION MENU
To edit the album (Music)
Remain 30:00 SP
HDD
Playback
Recording
Enter Album Name
Repeat Play Setting
Track View
Sort
Album and Track Operation
( below)
Useful functions during music play
( 42)
below
To edit the track (Music)
Delete Track
Properties
Enter Track Name
Album and Track Operation
( below)
Enter Artist Name
Repeat Play Setting
Album View
You can go back to Album View
Useful functions during music play
42
Delete
Video
Picture
Music
DELETE Navigator
HDD
1/ 1/ 06 Total 5
VIDEO
PICTURE
MUSIC
---
2/ 1/ 06 Total 3
---
Copy
Album View
002
001
---
---
TV Guide
Others
Drive Select
OK
Previous
Page 01/01
Next
RETURN
OK
OPTION
RETURN
Select
Press OK to show
pictures.
Deleting an album:
5a Press [, , , ] to select the item, then press
[DELETE ].
Deleting a still picture or track:
5b 1. Press [, , , ] to select the album which
contains the still picture or track to delete, then
press [OK].
2. Press [, , , ] to select the still picture or
track, then press [OK].
 Press [, ] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].
Notes
Tips
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Album and Track Operation
After performing steps − (
above)
Delete Album
Delete Track
Press [, ] to select “Delete”, then
press [OK].
 Once deleted, the recorded contents
are lost and cannot be restored. Make
certain before proceeding.
Enter Album
Name
Enter Track Name
You can give names to albums and
tracks.
( 47, Entering text)
Enter Artist Name
You can edit the artist name of the track.
( 47, Entering text)
Advanced Editing
Delete Album
68,
 You cannot delete while recording or copying.
Tips
To view other pages [Album (still picture) and still
picture only]
Press [, , , ] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then
press [OK].
– You can also press [, ] to view other pages.
Multiple editing [Album (still picture) and still picture
only]
Select with [, , , ], then press []. (Repeat.)
– A check mark appears. Press [] again to cancel.
– [HDD] [RAM] [SD] Deleting an item increases the available
space by the amount of space taken by the item deleted.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Notes
 When the timer recording starts, editing music stops on
the way.
55
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 55
2009/04/27 11:45:44
Copying titles or playlists
Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are applicable to the DMR-EX89 model only.
With this unit, you can select a
copy method from the two types
listed below.
(About copying still pictures
62)
Copy
Copy[Video
[Video(HDD
(HDDto
toDVD)]
DVD)]
Advanced
Advanced Copy
Copy
Easy copying from HDD to DVD
with no difficult settings. ( 58)
Make a copy list and then copy.
You can set the unit to copy titles or
playlists in the way you want. ( 59)
Features
Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)]
Advanced Copy
HDD
DVD


DVD
HDD
–

[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [+RW]
[DVD-V] (Only from a finalised disc)
High speed mode copy1
( below, Important)


[DVD-V] You cannot perform high-speed
copy with finalised discs.
[+RW] You cannot perform high-speed
copy from +RW to HDD.
Changing recording mode
–
Copy direction
Finalise3
Copying Video (MPEG2) from an SD
Card [EX89] ( 61)
Copying playlists4
Are chapters maintained?
Are thumbnails maintained?
Recording and Playing while Copying
Important
1
 2
[-R] [-R\DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R\DL]
[-R] [-R\DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R\DL]
Automatically finalised
Can be selected
High speed mode Normal speed mode High speed mode Normal speed mode
–
–

[HDD] [RAM] only
–
–
–



–5

–5

–
–6
–
7
–6
–

8
: Can do, –: Cannot do
To high speed copy titles (or playlists created from those titles), set “Recording Format” to “Video format” before recording to
the HDD (The default setting is “Video format”.
72).
However in the following cases, copying to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using the
high speed mode does not work.
 Playlists created from titles using a variety of recording modes or multiple titles using FR recording mode.
 Playlists mixed with a variety of audio types (Dolby Digital and LPCM, etc.)
 Titles that contain many deleted segments
 Titles that have been copied to the HDD from an SD card ([EX89]) or a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD (SD Video)
 [+R] [+R\DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode (Displayed
57)
 [+R] [+R\DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect
 [-R] [-R\DL] [-RW‹V›] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode
2
If you select a recording mode with better picture quality than the original, the picture quality does not improve. (However it
does prevent against degradation of picture quality.)
[+R\DL] You cannot copy in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
3
You cannot select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select”.
If you want to set auto-play select or the background colour, select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select” in “DVD Management”
before copying ( 69).
4
You cannot copy playlists with a play time more than 8 hours.
When you copy a playlist, it will become a title in the destination drive.
5
[RAM] [-R\DL] [+R\DL] [+RW]: One title becomes one chapter.
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R]: Chapters are created automatically ([-R] [-RW‹V›] about 5-minute chapters [+R] about 8-minute chapters) when
finalising after copying the disc.
6
Thumbnails return to the default position.
7
When copying playlists, the thumbnails may not reflect changes made to them.
8
Possible only with titles on the HDD
[However it is not possible when copying with automatic finalisation or when copying SD Video from an SD card ([EX89]).]
– You cannot perform chasing play or edit, etc. while copying.
– You cannot play a playlist while copying titles with “One time only recording” restriction ( 24).
– Still pictures or music cannot be played.
56
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 56
2009/04/27 11:45:44
 Approximate copying times (Max. speed)
(excludes time required to write data management information)
HDD
Recording
Recorded
Mode
XP
SP
LP
1 hour
EP (6H)
EP (8H)
5X Speed
12X Speed
4X Speed
4X Speed
8X Speed
4X Speed
4X Speed
DVD-RAM
DVD-R1
DVD-R DL2
DVD-RW3
+R4
+R DL2
+RW
Required
Required
Required
Required
Required
Required
Required
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
time
time
time
time
time
time
time
5 min.
8 min.
12 min. 5X
10X 15 min. 4X 15 min. 4X
7X 15 min. 4X 15 min. 4X
46 s.
20 s.
2 min.
7 min.
7 min.
3 min.
7 min.
7 min.
6 min. 10X
24X
8X
8X
16X
8X
8X
30 s.
30 s.
30 s.
45 s.
30 s.
30 s.
1 min.
3 min.
3 min.
1 min.
3 min.
3 min.
3 min. 20X
44X
16X
16X
32X
16X
16X
21 s.
45 s.
45 s.
53 s.
45 s.
45 s.
2 min.
2 min.
2 min. 30X
58 s. 62X
24X
24X
30 s.
30 s.
1 min.
1 min.
1 min.
40X
48 s. 75X
32X
31X
30 s.
53 s.
57 s.
 The above rated value indicates the fastest time and speed required for copying one-hour title from HDD to each disc in the
above list supporting High-Speed copying. The amount of time and speed may vary depending on the conditions such as the
area on where information is written or unique feature on the disc.
1
In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed DVD-R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 12X Speed DVD-R disc.
2
In this unit, copying with 8X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and +R DL, will be performed at the same speed as with 4X Speed discs,
DVD-R DL and +R DL.
3
In this unit, copying with a 6X Speed DVD-RW disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 4X Speed DVD-RW disc.
4
In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed +R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 8X Speed +R disc.
Notes
 When recording or playing while copying, the unit may not use the maximum recording speed.
 Depending on the condition of the disc, the unit may not copy using the maximum speed.
 When copying titles in high speed mode to high speed recording compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R 8X, +R 8X or +RW 4X,
the sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than normal. If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal (Silent)”
in “DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu ( 72).
Regarding copying to DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided)
and +R DL (Double Layer, single-sided)
When not copying in high speed mode, titles are temporarily
copied at normal speed to the HDD and then copied at
high speed to DVD-R DL and +R DL. The titles that were
temporarily copied to the HDD are then deleted.
You cannot copy to DVD-R DL and +R DL in the following
cases.
– When there is not enough free space on the HDD. (When
copying to a new blank disc, if you intend to fill a new disc
when copying to it, the equivalent of up to 4 hours of free
space in SP mode is needed on the HDD.)
– When the number of titles recorded to the HDD and the
number of titles to be copied to the DVD-R DL and +R DL
is greater than 499 in total.
When playing a title recorded on both layers, video and audio
may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers.
( 15)
Regarding copying of the broadcasts that allow “One time
only recording”
You can copy a recorded title to a CPRM ( 96) compatible
DVD-RAM, however, the title is deleted from the HDD.
 Titles or playlists cannot be copied from DVD-RAM to the
HDD.
 Titles will not be copied if they are protected ( 49).
 You cannot copy playlists created from “One time only
recording” titles.
 Titles with recording limitations and playlists cannot be
registered on the same copying list.
Advanced Editing
Copy restrictions
COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions
Depending on the icon, you may be informed about the on-screen display.

Titles and playlists that can be copied in high speed
mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL, +RW
Titles deleted from the HDD by “One time only
recording” restriction after copying. ( 24, Copyonce recording)
Titles and playlists that can be copied in high speed
mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format) (However, titles and playlists cannot be
copied in high speed mode to +R or +RW)
[+R]DL]
is displayed, but copy cannot be
performed, even in normal speed mode.
Title or playlist contains still picture(s)
 Still picture(s) cannot be copied.
Title with “One time only recording” restriction
( 24, Copy-once recording)
(NTSC) Title or playlist recorded using a different encoding
(PAL) system from that of the TV system currently selected
on the unit.
 Titles and playlists displaying these marks
cannot be selected.
57
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 57
2009/04/27 11:45:44
Copying titles or playlists
Before copying
Speed and recording mode when copying
[HDD]  [RAM]: High speed
[HDD]  [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]: Refer to the
following table.
“Recording Format” setting (
72)
Copy speed
Only titles recorded with “Recording Format”
set to “Video format”.
High speed
Only Titles recorded with “Recording Format”
set to “VR format”.
Normal speed
When making a copy of multiple titles that
were recorded with “Recording Format” set to
“Video format” and “VR format”.
Notes
 When copying in normal speed, recording mode will be
set to FR. (However, if there is still not enough space after
setting to FR mode, copy will not be performed.)
Check the properties of a title and sort COPY
Navigator
Perform steps − of “Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)]”.
 Press [,] to select the title, then press [OPTION].
COPY Navigator
HDD
In the following cases, even if “Recording Format” is set to
“Video format”, copy will perform at normal speed.

 [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] When the copying source was recorded
in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
 When the copy destination (disc) does not have enough
space.
 When the title aspect for the copying source is 16:9:
– [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
– [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] copying source was recorded in “EP”
or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
Preparation:
 Insert a disc that you can use for copying ( 15, 81).
 Confirm that there is enough remaining disc space.
 Titles and playlists recorded using a different encoding
system (PAL or NTSC) from the TV system currently selected
on the unit cannot be copied.
 [-R] Video (Titles or playlists) cannot be copied to a disc with
still pictures (JPEG) already recorded on it.
 [-R] Still images cannot be copied to a DVD-R disc with video
already recorded on it.
Properties
OK
RETURN
Properties
[HDD]  [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
(You cannot copy to finalised discs.)
 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
 Press [,] to select “Copy”, then press [OK].
 Press [,] to select “Video (HDD to DVD)”, then
press [OK].
COPY Navigator
HDD
Rec time
0:52(SP)
All Titles
Total : 0
No. Channel Date
001 BBC 26/9
002 BBC1 27/9
003 AV2 3/10
004 BBC 3/10
005 AV2 4/10
006 BBC2 10/10
007 BBC 10/10
008 BBC 11/10
---
Disc Space: 4310MB
Total Size:
0MB( 0%)
Day Time
FRI 13:30
SAT 12:15
FRI 20:00
FRI 22:05
SAT 16:10
FRI 9:25
FRI 13:30
SAT 21:00
Title Name
Disc Space: 4310MB
Total Size:
0MB( 0%)
No. Channel Date
001 BBC 26/9
002 BBC1 27/9
003 AV2 3/10
004 BBC 3/10
005 AV2 4/10
006 BBC2 10/10
007 BBC 10/10
008 BBC 11/10
---
Rec time
0:52(SP)
Day Time
FRI 13:30
SAT 12:15
FRI 20:00
FRI 22:05
SAT 16:10
FRI 9:25
FRI 13:30
SAT 21:00
Title Name
Page 01/01
Sort
Grouped Titles
Press [, ] to select “Properties”, then
press [OK].
The name, recording date, channel etc. of the
selected title are shown.
Sort
(All Titles
screen only)
 Press [, ] to select “Sort”, then press
[OK].
 Press [, ] to select the item, then
press [OK].
This changes the way that titles are
displayed. You can select to display titles by
No., channel, recording date, day, recording
start time and title name. (You cannot select
this item if a title has a check mark.) If you
close the COPY Navigator screen, the display
order is cancelled.
Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)]
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R
DL are automatically finalised ( 96). After finalising, the discs
become play-only and you can also play them on other DVD
equipment. However, you can no longer record or edit.
All Titles
Total : 0
Notes
 If you register multiple titles, they are copied in order
from the title at the top of the screen and not in the order
you registered them. To change the order that titles are
copied, create a copying list and then copy the contents
of the list ( 59).
Tips
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To stop copying (
60)
COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions (
57)
Page 01/01
OK
RETURN
OPTION
Select
 Press [,] to select the title you want to copy,
then press [].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
 Press [] again to cancel.
 Press [OK].
 Press [] to select “Start”, then press [OK].
58
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 58
2009/04/27 11:45:44
 Press [,,,] to select the title or playlist, then press
[].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you
select all necessary items.
– Press [] again to cancel.
– The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item
at a time.
– When you switch between the “VIDEO” and “Playlists”
tab, the check mark is cancelled.
– When copying to a disc using high speed mode,
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] : only items indicated with “
” or
“
” can be registered.
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : only items indicated with “
” can
be registered.
– To view other pages ( 60)
 Press [OK] to confirm.
– To edit the copying list ( below)
Copying using the copying list
—Advanced Copy
[HDD]  [RAM] [+RW]
[-RW‹VR›]  [HDD]
[HDD]  [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[SD]  [HDD] [RAM]
You can order titles and playlists as desired for copy to disc.
See also “Before copying” ( 58).
 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
 Press [,] to select “Copy”, then press [OK].
 Press [,] to select “Advanced Copy”, then press
[OK].
Copy
Cancel All
Source
HDD
Destination
DVD
HDD DVD
2 Copy Mode
VIDEO
You cannot start copying when the value of the “Size”
exceeds 100% (“Destination Capacity” is not sufficient)
( 60, About the data size for copying).
 Press [] to confirm.
High Speed
3 Create List
0
Select the copy direction.
Start Copying
OK
RETURN
– If you are not going to change the registered list, press []
several times ( step).
 Press [,] to select “Start Copying”, then press [OK].
 Press [] to select “Yes”, then press [OK] to start
copying.
 Set the copy direction.
[HDD]  [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Press [,] to select “Copy & Finalise” or “Copy
Only”, then press [OK].
– If you are not going to change the copying direction, press
[] ( step ).
Press [,] to select “Copy Direction”, then press [].
Press [,] to select “Source”, then press [OK].
Press [,] to select the drive, then press [OK].
Press [,] to select “Destination”, then press [OK].
Press [,] to select the drive, then press [OK].
The same drive as the copy source cannot be selected.
 Press [] to confirm.





 Set the recording mode.
– If “Copy & Finalise” is selected
After finalising, the discs become play-only and you can also
play them on other DVD equipment. However, you can no
longer record or edit.
Edit the copying list
Select the item in step – (
– Press [OPTION].
– If you are not going to change the recording mode, press []
( step ).






Press [,] to select “Copy Mode”, then press [].
Press [,] to select “Format”, then press [OK].
Press [,] to select “VIDEO”, then press [OK].
Press [,] to select “Recording Mode”, then press [OK].
Press [,] to select the mode, then press [OK].
Press [] to confirm.
 Register titles and playlists for copy.
Delete All
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
1. Press [, ] to select “Delete All”, then
press [OK].
2. Press [, ] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
Add
Add new items to the copying list.
1. Press [, ] to select “Add”, then press
[OK].
2. Press [, , , ] to select the title or
playlist, then press [].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this
step until you select all necessary items.
Press [] again to cancel.
3. Press [OK].
Delete
Delete the selected items.
1. Press [, ] to select “Delete”, then
press [OK].
2. Press [, ] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
Move
Move selected items or change the order of
items on the copying list.
1. Press [, ] to select “Move”, then press
[OK].
2. Press [, ] to select the destination,
then press [OK].
Copy
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Size:
0MB ( 0%)
No.
HDD DVD
Name of item
Size
New item (Total=0)
2 Copy Mode
VIDEO
High Speed
3 Create List
Page 01/01
Create copy list.
Start Copying
OK
RETURN
OPTION
 Press [,] to select “New item”, then press [OK].
 Press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO” or press the
“Green” button to select “Playlists”.
Create List
HDD
All Titles
008
007
VIDEO
0:30(XP)
BBC 1 10/10 FRI
BBC 1 11/10 SAT
---
---
Previous
OK
RETURN
OPTION
Playlists
---
---
Page 02/02
Add
Move
 Press [,] to select “Create List”, then press [].
Cancel All
Delete All
Delete
– If you are going to copy a registered list without making any
changes to it ( step ).
1 Copy Direction
above)
Advanced Editing
1 Copy Direction
Next
Select Previous
Next
59
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 59
2009/04/27 11:45:45
Copying titles or playlists
Cancel all registered copying setting and lists
After performing steps – ( 59)
 Press [, ] to select “Cancel All”, then press
[OK].
 Press [] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
 The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following
situations.
– When a title, still picture, etc. has been recorded or deleted
at the copy source
– When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the
unit, remove the card, open the tray, change the copy
direction, etc.
About the data size for copying
Data size of each registered item
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Size:
0MB (0%)
No.
Name of item
Size
New item (Total=0)
Page 01/01
Create copy list.
Data size recorded to the copy destination
 When copying at normal speed, the total
data size will change according to the
recording mode.
 The total data size shown may be
larger than the sum of the data sizes for
each registered item, because of data
management information being written
to the copy destination, etc.
Tips
To view other pages
Press [,,,] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then
press [OK].
– You can also press [, ] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
Select with [,,,] and press []. (Repeat.)
Press [OK] to register to the list.
– A check mark appears. Press [] again to cancel.
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
(You cannot stop while finalising)
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
Recording and playing while copying
You can record or play using the HDD while high speed
copying. (Only when high speed copying without finalising)
– Still pictures and music recorded on the HDD cannot be
played.
Press [OK] to cancel the screen display.
– To confirm the current progress
Press [STATUS ].
Notes
When you stop High-speed copying
All titles that have completely copied at the point cancelled
are copied.
When you stop Normal Speed copying
Copies until the point cancelled. However as for titles with
“One time only recording” restriction, only titles that have
completely copied at the point cancelled are copied to the
disc. Titles that are cancelled before the copy is complete
are not copied and remain on the HDD.
– [-R]DL] [+R]DL] If copy is cancelled during the step while
temporarily copying to the HDD, then nothing will be
copied. However, if copy is cancelled during the step
while copying to disc from the HDD, then only titles
completely copied at the point cancelled are copied.
Even if the title was not copied to the DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW, the
amount of remaining writable disc space becomes less.
 Timer recordings executed while copying are recorded to
the HDD regardless of the recording drive settings.
(Only when high speed copying without finalising)
 To play DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R and +R DL on other players, it is necessary to
finalise them after copy.
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+R DL
[DVD-V]  [HDD]
You can copy the content of finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, and +R DL to the HDD and
re-edit.
While playing a disc, the content being played is copied to the
HDD according to the set time
 Operations and on-screen displays during copy are also
recorded.
 Almost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent
illegal copying, and cannot be copied.
Preparation:
 Insert the finalised disc (
81).
After performing steps – (“Format” is automatically set
to “DVD-Video”) ( 59, Copying using the copying list—
Advanced Copy)
 Set “Copy Time”.
– If you are not going to change the setting ( step).
 Press [, ] to select “Copy Time”, then press [].
 Press [, ] to select “Time Setting”, then press [OK].
– Setting the unit to copy all the content on the disc
 Press [, ] to select “Off”, then press [OK].
 Press [] to confirm.
Copy will continue until there is not enough available
recording space on the HDD.
– Setting the unit to copy according to the set time
 Press [, ] to select “On”, then press [OK].
 Press [, ] to select “Copy Time”, then press [OK].
Copy
Cancel All
1 Copy Direction
DVD HDD
2
2 Copy Mode
DVD-Video
3 Copy Time
Hour
00 Min.
XP
Set the time a few minutes
longer.
 Press [, ] to select “Hour” and “Min.”, then press [,
] to set the recording time.
 Press [OK].
60
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 60
2009/04/27 11:45:45
 Press [] to confirm.
Copying to the HDD continues for the set time even after
the content being played finishes.
– Set a few minutes longer than the source title, in order to
include the operation time before play begins.
– You can also set the recording time with the numbered buttons.
 Press [, ] to select “Start Copying”, then press [OK].
Press [] to select “Yes”, then press [OK] to start
copying. The disc top menu is displayed.
– Disc play automatically begins from title 1 when “Title 1” is
selected from the “Auto-Play Select” menu when finalising
the disc ( 69).
 When the top menu is displayed
Press [, , , ] to select the title you want to
start copying, then press [OK].
My favourite
01/02
01
Chapter 1
02
Chapter 2
03
Chapter 3
04
Chapter 4
05
06
While playing in order, all the titles after the selected title are
recorded until the set time. (After the last title on the disc has
finished playing the top menu is recorded until the set time is
reached.)
Tips
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To stop copying
Press [].
You can also press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds to
stop copying.
 If stopped partway, copying will be up to that point.
The display below automatically appears when you insert a
card into the SD card slot while stopped.
Press [, ] to select “Copy Video (MPEG2)”, then press
[OK].
Then go to step  on page 59.
SD Card
Copy Video (MPEG2)
Play Pictures (JPEG)
Copy New Pictures (JPEG)
SELECT
RETURN
OK
 SD Video on an SD card are automatically registered on the
copying list.
 If there are no SD Video on an SD card, “Copy Video
(MPEG2)” is not displayed.
Copying Video (MPEG2) from a video
equipment
Motion pictures encoded in the MPEG2 format, which have
been taken by a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD etc,
can be copied from the camera’s HDD to this unit’s HDD or
DVD-RAM.
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
 You cannot playback SD Video in the camera’s HDD with this
unit.
You must copy the files to the HDD or a DVD-RAM.
 You cannot playback or record while copying SD Video.
Video (MPEG2)
VIDEO
HDD
Notes
 If you perform search, frame-by-frame or pause while
copying, that portion of title is not recorded.
 The screen on the right is recorded at the beginning.
 The content is recorded as 1 title from
the start of copy to the end.
 If play does not begin automatically
or if the top menu does not display
automatically, press [] (PLAY) to start.
 Even if you copy a high quality video/
audio DVD, the original picture and audio
quality cannot be exactly replicated.
 If you want to copy a title from a finalised DVD-RW (DVD
Video Recording format), create a copy list and then copy
( 59, Copying using the copying list—Advanced Copy).
Copying Video (MPEG2) from an SD Card
[EX89]
Motion pictures encoded in the MPEG2 format, which have
been taken by a Panasonic SD Video Camera, digital video
camera etc, can be stored on HDD or DVD-RAM.
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
 You cannot playback SD Video on an SD card with this unit.
You must copy the files to the HDD or a DVD-RAM.
 You cannot playback or record while copying SD Video.
 This unit cannot copy AVCHD format motion pictures from an
SD card.
Video (MPEG2)
VIDEO
USB cable

DVD Video Recording format
Preparation:
1 Turn on both this unit and the camera.
2 Connect the camera to this unit with USB cable.
3 Select the appropriate mode that makes the camera
ready for data transfer (such as “PC CONNECT”) on the
camera.
 Refer to the camera’s operating instructions for detail.
The display below automatically appears when you connect
the camera to this unit.
Press [, ] to select “Copy Video (MPEG2)”, then
press [OK]. Then go to step  on page 59.
Advanced Editing
DVD-RAM
USB device
Play Video ( DivX )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy All Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Play Music ( MP3&WMA )
Copy Music ( MP3&WMA )
Update CD database on HDD
SELECT
OK
RETURN
 SD Video on the camera are automatically registered on
the copy list.
 If there are no SD Video on the camera, “Copy Video
(MPEG2)” is not displayed.
HDD
DVD-RAM

DVD Video Recording format
61
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 61
2009/04/27 11:45:45
Copying Still Pictures
Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive
are applicable to the DMR-EX89 model only.
To register on a folder by folder basis
 Press [, ] to select “Create List”, then press [].
 Press [, ] to select “Picture/Folder”, then press [OK].
 SDHC Memory Cards used for recording with this unit can
only be used with other SDHC Memory Card-compatible
equipment. SDHC Memory Cards cannot be used with
equipment that is only compatible with SD Memory Cards.
 You cannot copy pictures recorded to DVD-R, DVD-R DL or
CD-R/CD-RW.
 Still pictures copied from USB memories or SD cards are
grouped by the shooting date in the HDD or DVD-RAM.
Copy
Cancel All
HDD DVD
 While stopped
 Press [, ] to select “Start Copying”, then press [OK].
– Only when copying individual still pictures
[HDD]  [HDD] [RAM] [-R] (JPEG) [SD]
[RAM]  [HDD] [RAM] [SD]
[SD]  [-R] (JPEG) [SD]
When specifying another folder as the copying destination,
select “Folder”.
press [OK].
Copy
Cancel All
1 Copy Direction
Source
HDD
Destination
DVD
Name of item
Size
New item (Total=0)
 Press [, ] to select “Folder”, then press [OK].
 Press [, ] to select “New item”, then press [OK].
 Press [, ] to select the folder, then press [].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary items.
Press [] again to cancel.
The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If you
want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a time.
– To show other pages ( 63)
 Press [OK] to confirm.
– To edit the copying list ( below)
 Press [] to confirm.
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]  [HDD] [RAM] [SD]
[HDD] [SD]  [-R] (JPEG)
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
No.
2 Copy Mode
Copying using the copying list
 Press [, ] to select “Copy”, then press [OK].
 Press [, ] to select “Advanced Copy”, then
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Picture
Picture/Folder
1 Copy Direction
HDD DVD
2 Copy Mode
Folder
New folder
PICTURE High Speed
3 Create List
Make a new folder and dub ?
0
001
002
003
-----
100__DVD
101__DVD
102__DVD
New folder
 Press [] to select “Yes”, then press [OK] to start
copying.
Select the copy direction.
Start Copying
OK
 For copy to DVD-R
RETURN
Press [, ] to select “Copy & Finalise” or “Copy
Only”, then press [OK] to start copying.
– If you are not going to change the registered list, press []
several times ( step ).
 Set the copy direction.
– If you are not going to change the copying direction, press
[] ( step ).
 Press [, ] to select “Copy Direction”, then press [].
 Press [, ] to select “Source”, then press [OK].
 Press [, ] to select the drive, then press [OK].
 Press [, ] to select “Destination”, then press [OK].
 Press [, ] to select the drive, then press [OK].
The same drive as the copy source can be selected.
 Press [] to confirm.
 Set the copy mode.
– If you are not going to change the recording mode, press []
( step ).
 Press [, ] to select “Copy Mode”, then press [].
 Press [, ] to select “Format”, then press [OK].
 Press [, ] to select “PICTURE”, then press [OK].
“Recording Mode” is automatically set to “High Speed”.
 Press [] to confirm.
Edit the copying list
Select the item in step – (for a still picture) (
– (for a folder) ( above)
Delete All
– Press [OPTION].
or
– Press [OPTION].
Add
Add new items to the copying list.
1. Press [, ] to select “Add”, then press
[OK].
2. Press [, , , ] to select the still picture
or folder to be added, then press [].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step
until you select all necessary items.
Press [] again to cancel.
3. Press [OK].
Delete
Delete the selected items.
1. Press [, ] to select “Delete”, then press
[OK].
2. Press [] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
Copy
Cancel All
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Picture
Picture/Folder
No.
Name of item
Size
New item (Total=0)
2 Copy Mode
PICTURE High Speed
3C
62
t Li t
To register individual still pictures
 Press [, ] to select “Create List”, then press [].
 Press [, ] to select “New item”, then press [OK].
 Press [, , , ] to select the still picture, then press
[].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary items.
Press [] again to cancel.
The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If you
want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a time.
– To show other pages ( 63)
– To select another folder ( 63)
 Press [OK] to confirm.
– To edit the copying list ( right)
 Press [] to confirm.
Delete
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
1. Press [, ] to select “Delete All”, then
press [OK].
2. Press [] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
– If you are going to copy a registered list without making any
changes to it ( step ).
You can register still pictures or still picture folders.
– Still pictures and folders cannot be registered on the same list.
HDD DVD
Add
Delete
All
 Register still pictures for copy.
1 Copy Direction
left) or
Cancel all registered copying setting and lists
After performing steps – ( left)
 Press [, ] to select “Cancel All”, then press
[OK].
 Press [, ] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
 The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following
situations.
– When a title, still picture, etc. has been recorded or deleted
at the copy source
– When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the
unit, remove the card, open the tray, change the copy
direction, etc.
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 62
2009/04/27 11:45:45
Tips
Tips
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To show other pages
Press [, , , ] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then
press [OK].
– You can also press [, ] to show other pages.
To select another folder
After performing step – ( 62, To register individual still
pictures)
 Press [, , , ] to select “Folder”, then press [OK].
 Press [, ] to select the folder, then press [OK].
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
Create List
Create List
Picture (JPEG)
Folder
HDD
HDD
Folder
0001
103__DVD
0002
0003
\DCIM\100__DVD
001 100__DVD
002 101__DVD
003 102__DVD
004 103__DVD
---------
0004
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
Page 001/001
Picture 0012
Next
 This unit saves the information on up to 12,000 still
pictures and 30 SD cards. If additional still pictures are
imported, then the older information will be deleted.
 If the space on the destination drive runs out or the
number of files/folders to be copied exceeds the
maximum ( 18), copying will stop partway through.
 You cannot copy the information about the picture
rotation.
Copying still pictures on the USB memory
Page 01/01
Previous
Notes
File 0012
OK
OK
RETURN
Copying all the still pictures
RETURN
[USB]  [HDD]
 While stopped
Insert the USB memory ( 81).
The menu is automatically displayed.
USB device
Play Video ( DivX )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy All Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Play Music ( MP3&WMA )
Copy Music ( MP3&WMA )
Update CD database on HDD
Notes
 The sequence in which the still pictures are registered on
the copy list may not be the same at the copy destination.
 If still pictures are already contained inside the copy
destination folder, the new still pictures are recorded
following the existing still pictures.
 If the space on the destination drive runs out or the
number of files/folders to be copied exceeds the
maximum ( 18), copying will stop partway through.
 You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.
 [-R] Video (Titles or playlists) cannot be copied to a disc
with still pictures (JPEG) already recorded on it.
 [-R] Still images cannot be copied to a DVD-R disc with
video already recorded on it.
OK
RETURN
Copy New Pictures
Copy from
SD CARD
Copy Video (MPEG2)
Copy to
Play Pictures (JPEG)
Copy New Pictures (JPEG)
RETURN
HDD
Copy all pictures ( JPEG ) by date.
SELECT
Copy
OK
Cancel
RETURN
then press [OK].
 Press [, ] to select “Copy”, then press [OK].
Copying using the copying list
[USB]  [HDD] [RAM] [SD]
 While stopped
Insert the USB memory ( 81).
The menu is automatically displayed.
Play Video ( DivX )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy All Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Play Music ( MP3&WMA )
Copy Music ( MP3&WMA )
Update CD database on HDD
Cancel All
1 Copy Direction
RETURN
Source
USB
Destination
HDD
USB HDD
2 Copy Mode
PICTURE High Speed
3 Create List
Start Copying
SELECT
OK
Copy
0
Select the copy direction.
OK
RETURN
 Press [, ] to select “Copy Pictures (JPEG)”, then
press [OK].
 Perform steps – on “Copying using the copying
list”. (
62)
Tips
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
Copy added pictures (JPEG) by date.
You can copy favorite pictures (JPEG) using Advanced copy.
SELECT
SELECT
OK
HDD
USB
Copy to
 Press [, ] to select “Copy All Pictures (JPEG)”,
USB device
SD Card
Copy from
SELECT
Copying new still pictures on the SD
card—Copy New Pictures [EX89]
[SD]  [HDD]
This unit saves information about imported still pictures.
Therefore, if still pictures are imported from the same SD card,
then only new still pictures will be imported.
 While stopped
Insert the SD card ( 81).
The menu is automatically displayed.
Copy All Pictures
Advanced Editing
You can also select folders with the numbered buttons.
e.g., 5:
[0]
[0]
[5]
15:
[0]
[1]
[5]
115:
[1]
[1]
[5]
 The still pictures of different folders cannot be registered
on the same list.
Copy
OK
Cancel
RETURN
When “SD Card” screen does not appear
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the SD drive.
2 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
3 Press [, ] to select “Copy”, then press [OK].
4 Press [, ] to select “Copy New Pictures”, then
press [OK].
You can proceed to step .
 Press [, ] to select “Copy New Pictures (JPEG)”,
then press [OK].
 Press [, ] to select “Copy”, then press [OK].
Notes
 Copy Mode is fixed at “PICTURE High Speed”.
 The structure of folders on the USB memory may not be
the same at the copy destination.
 If the space on the destination drive runs out or the
number of files/folders to be copied exceeds the
maximum ( 18), copying will stop partway through.
 You cannot copy the information about the picture
rotation.
63
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 63
2009/04/27 11:45:45
Copying music to HDD
You can store the following formats of music data in this unit’s
HDD.
Notes
Music CD (CD-DA)
When copying music CDs, this unit makes access to the
internal Gracenote® Database to obtain title information.
The album name, track name and artist name are assigned
automatically allowing you find the track easily when playing
back.
 While recording, no other operations can be performed.
Timer recordings will not proceed.
 Tracks recorded on the HDD cannot be transferred to a
disc, USB memory or SD card.
 CDs which have SCMS (Serial Copy Management
System) restrictions cannot be recorded to the HDD.
MP3/WMA
You can copy MP3 or WMA files from the USB memory or CD-R/
CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL.
About the Gracenote® Database
The Gracenote® Database is a database used to search and
retrieve CD title information.
When a CD is inserted or recording from a CD begins, the unit
will automatically search for and obtain information about the
inserted CD.
The Gracenote® Database comes pre-installed on this unit,
so titles and artist information can be obtained. Please note
however that the newest CD titles, etc. may not be registered
yet to the internal database. This unit has an internal database
containing information for approximately 350,000 album titles.
You can update the internal database ( 65).
If there are CDs with very similar title information, then
the incorrect title information may be obtained. If no title
suggestions are found, then track name, and artist name will
be blank.
In these cases, enter the CD title information manually, after
recording to the HDD has completed.
Copying music from a CD
[CD]  [HDD]
All tracks on the music CD (CD-DA) are recorded on the HDD.
(Cannot record track-by-track.)
 One CD is recorded on the HDD as one album.
 Audio quality: LPCM
 The maximum number of albums on HDD: 300
(Depends on the remaining capacity.)
If titles or pictures are recorded, then the number of
albums that can be recorded will be reduced.
Preparation:
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
 Insert a music CD.
The menu is automatically displayed.
 Press [, ] to select “Copy Music”, then press
[OK].
The unit starts accessing the Gracenote® Database and
searches for the title information.
– If search results indicate that multiple titles were
found
Press [, ] to select the appropriate title, then
press [OK].
 Press [, ] to select “Copy”, then press [OK].
Recording starts.
Tips
To stop recording
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
 The recording is cancelled, then no tracks on the CD will
be recorded.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
Copying music from a USB memory or
CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] (MP3/WMA) [HDD]
You can copy MP3 or WMA files recorded on USB memory or
CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL to the HDD by file or folder.
 One folder is recorded on the HDD as one group.
 The maximum number of albums on HDD: 300
The maximum number of tracks on HDD: 3000
(Depends on the remaining capacity.)
If titles or pictures are recorded, then the number of albums
that can be recorded will be reduced.

Folders with music files (groups) copied to the HDD will be
treated as albums.
 While stopped
Insert the USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/
DVD-R DL ( 81).
The menu is automatically displayed.
 Press [, ] to select “Copy Music (MP3&WMA)”,
then press [OK].
“Copy Direction” and “Copy Mode” are automatically
set to “USBHDD”, “DVDHDD” or “CDHDD” and
“MUSIC High Speed”, respectively.
 Register MP3 or WMA files for copy.
– If you are going to copy a registered list without
making any changes to it ( step ).
You can register MP3/WMA files or file folders.
– MP3/WMA files and folders cannot be registered on
the same list.
To register individual MP3/WMA files
Press [, ] to select “Create List”, then press [].
Press [, ] to select “New item”, then press [OK].
Press [, ] to select the folder, then press [OK].
Press [, ] to select the MP3/WMA file, then press [].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary items.
Press [] again to cancel.
The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at
a time.
 Press [OK].
To edit the copying list ( 65)
 Press [] to confirm.




To register on a folder by folder basis
Press [, ] to select “Create List”, then press [].
Press [, ] to select “Track/Folder”, then press [OK].
Press [, ] to select “Folder”, then press [OK].
Press [, ] to select “New item”, then press [OK].
Press [, ] to select the folder, then press [].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary items.
Press [] again to cancel.
The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at
a time.
 Press [OK].
To edit the copying list ( 65)
 Press [] to confirm.





64
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 64
2009/04/27 11:45:46
[OK].
For individual files only
 When specifying an existing folder as the copying
destination
 Press [, ] to select “Folder”, then press [OK].
 Press [, ] to select the folder, then press [OK].
 When creating a new folder as the copying destination
 Press [, ] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
 Enter the folder name ( 47, Entering Text).
 Press [, ] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
Tips
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
Notes
 The sequence in which the MP3/WMA files are registered
on the copy list may not be the same at the copy
destination.
 If MP3/WMA files are already contained inside the copy
destination folder, the new MP3/WMA files are recorded
following the existing MP3/WMA files.
To edit the copying list
Select the item in step – (for a MP3/WMA file) or – (for
a folder). ( 64, Copying music from a USB memory or CD-R/
CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL)
 Press [OPTION].
 Press [, ] to select the operation, then press [OK].
Delete All:
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
Press [, ] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
Add:
Add new items to the copying list.
 Press [, ] to select the MP3/WMA file or folder, then
press [].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary items.
Press [] again to cancel selection.
 Press [OK].
To update Gracenote® Database
To update the database with information on CDs that were
recently released, follow the instructions below.
Preparing the update data
 Visit the following website.
http://panasonic.net/pavc/support/gn/
 Download the data to your USB memory.
 USB memory 1 GB or larger is required.
 Refer to the instruction on the website for more
information.
Updating the database on this unit
 Turn on this unit.
 Insert the USB memory (
81).
The menu is automatically displayed.
 Press [, ] to select “Update CD database on
HDD”, then press [OK].
 Press [, ] to select “Update”, then press [OK].
 Updating takes up to 20 minutes.
 Do not disconnect the USB memory and the AC
mains lead while updating.
 Once started, you cannot cancel updating. A message
appears when updating is finished.
 Press [OK].
Notes
 Timer recordings do not start while updating.
 Updating overwrites the internal database forcibly
regardless of whether the data in the USB memory is the
latest or not. Make sure you download the latest version
from the website.
 Some of the CD title information in the database may be
deleted after updating the database.
 No name will be assigned after copying a CD to HDD if
the CD title information of the CD is not registered in the
database. Even if the CD title information of that CD is
added to the database by updating later, the information
will not be assigned to the track/album already copied on
the HDD. (The names will be still blank.)
 Depending on the situation of Panasonic or Gracenote,
upgrading the Gracenote® Database and providing it
through the Web may be discontinued without notice.
Advanced Editing
 Press [, ] to select “Start Copying”, then press
Delete:
Delete the selected items.
Press [, ] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
To cancel all registered copying settings and lists
After performing steps −( 64, Copying music from a
USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL)
 Press [, ] to select “Cancel All”, then press [OK].
 Press [, ] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
 The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following
situations.
– When a file has been recorded or deleted at the copy
source
– When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the
unit, remove the USB memory, open the tray, change the
copy direction, etc.
Notes
 If the space on the destination drive runs out or the
number of files/folders to be copied exceeds the
maximum ( 18), copying will stop partway through.
65
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 65
2009/04/27 11:45:46
Setting On-Screen Display
Accessing the On-Screen Display
When playing discs (except for JPEG discs), you can display
and set the options including disc audio, subtitle, image quality,
sound effect, Repeat Play, etc. In addition, when receiving the
multi-channel broadcast, you can change the audio settings.
Menu options will differ based on disc type and contents.
Disc Menu
Tips
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD] and DivX
You can change the settings of disc audio, subtitle, etc.
Soundtrack
]HDD\ [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
The disc’s audio attributes appear ( below, Audio attributes).
[DVD-V]
Select the audio and language ( below, Audio attributes,
Soundtrack/Subtitle language).
[VCD] (SVCD) and DivX
Select the soundtrack number.
 Soundtrack numbers are displayed even when there is only
one audio type.
Subtitle
]HDD\ [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
(Only discs that contain subtitle on/off information)
Turn the subtitle on/off.
 Subtitle on/off information cannot be recorded using this unit.
[DVD-V]
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the language ( below,
Soundtrack/Subtitle language).
[VCD] (SVCD) and DivX
Turn the subtitle on/off and select “Text” or the subtitle number.
 “Text” or subtitle numbers are displayed even if there are not
multiple subtitles.
Audio channel
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] and DivX
Change audio during playback.
LR / L / R
To exit the on-screen display
Press [DISPLAY].
Source Select (DivX)
 Automatic: The constructing method of the DivX contents is
 Press [DISPLAY].
Menu
Item
Setting
 Press [, ] to select a menu, then press [].
 Press [, ] to select an item, then press [].
 Press [, ] to select a setting.
Follow the on-screen prompts to change individual
settings.
Notes
 Some settings may not be changeable, based on the
unit’s current activity (playing, stopped, etc.) and disc
contents.
automatically distinguished and output.
Select when the disc contents were recorded using
interlace.
 Progressive: Select when the disc contents were recorded using
progressive.
 Interlace:
Angle
[DVD-V]
Change the number to select an angle.
PBC (Playback control
96) [VCD]
Indicates whether menu play (playback control) is on or off.
Soundtrack/Subtitle language
ENG: English
DAN: Danish
FRA: French
POR: Portuguese
DEU: German
RUS: Russian
ITA:
Italian
JPN: Japanese
ESP: Spanish
CHI: Chinese
NLD: Dutch
KOR: Korean
SVE: Swedish
MAL: Malay
NOR: Norwegian VIE: Vietnamese
THA:
POL:
CES:
SLK:
HUN:
FIN:
:
Thai
Polish
Czech
Slovak
Hungarian
Finnish
Others
Audio attributes
LPCM/
Digital/DTS/MPEG: Signal type
k (kHz):
b (bit):
ch (channel):
Sampling frequency
Number of bits
Number of channels
Notes
 You cannot make a change when there is no recording.
 Some discs allow changes to soundtracks, subtitles, and
angles only by using the disc’s menus ( 20).
66
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 66
2009/04/27 11:45:46
Play Menu
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›] [CD] [VCD]
Repeat Play
This function works only when the elapsed play time is
displayed.
Select the item for repeat play. Depending on the disc, the
items that can be selected will differ.
Select “Off” to cancel.
Picture Menu
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›]
You can change the progressive output setting and the noise
reduction setting when playing discs or of images from the
connected device.
Playback NR
“On” reduces noise and picture degradation.
Progressive [Only when you have set “Progressive” to “On” in
the Setup menu ( 74).]
Select “On” to enable progressive output.
 Select “Off” if the picture is stretched horizontally.
Transfer [Only when you have selected “On” in “Progressive”
( above)]
Select the method of conversion for progressive output to suit
the type of material being played.
Sound Menu
You can change the settings of audio when receiving the multichannel broadcast, and also change the settings of sound
effect when playing discs.
DVB Multi Audio
[MPEG Audio only]
If more than one audio channel is output, you can set the
desired channel before recording.
 DVB Multi Audio cannot be selected during playback or
recording.
 Depending on the broadcast, the items that can be selected
will differ.
English 1/ English 2
Dialogue Enhancer
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›] and DivX
(Dolby Digital, 3-channel or over only, including a centre
channel)
When “On”, the volume of the centre channel is raised to make
dialogue easier to hear.
Other Menu
Position
Change where this menu screen appears on your TV.
When the output signal is PAL
(When the tray is opened, the setting will return to “Auto”.)
 Auto:
Automatically detects the film and video content,
and appropriately converts it.
 Video:
Select when using “Auto”, and the content is
distorted.
Select this if the edges of the
film content appear jagged or
rough when “Auto” is selected.
However, if the video content
is distorted as shown in the
illustration to the right, then select “Auto”.
Setting Menus
 Film:
When the output signal is NTSC
 Auto1
(normal): Automatically detects the film and video content,
and appropriately converts it.
 Auto2:
In addition to “Auto1”, automatically detects
film contents with different frame rates and
appropriately converts it.
 Video:
Select when using “Auto1” and “Auto2”, and the
content is distorted.
Input NR
Reduces the noise while recording.
 Automatic: Noise reduction only works on picture input from
a video tape.
 On:
Noise reduction works for any video input.
 Off:
Noise reduction is off. Select when you want to
record input as is.
67
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 67
2009/04/27 11:45:46
HDD, DVD and Card Management
Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive
are applicable to the DMR-EX89 model only.
You can manage discs or cards through formatting, finalising
and other operations.
Accessing the Management Menus
With the unit stopped
 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or
SD drive.
 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
 Press [, ] to select “Others”, then press [OK].
FUNCTION MENU
Remain 30:00 SP
HDD
Playback
Recording
Delete
Copy
Playlists
Flexible Rec
DV Auto Rec
HDD Management
Setup
TV Guide
Others
Drive Select
OK
RETURN
[RAM] (With a cartridge)
With the write-protect tab in the protect
position, you cannot record to, edit, format, or
erase from the disc.
[SD]
Switch the write-protect switch to the “LOCK”
position.
LO C K
Preparation:
 [RAM] [SD] Release protection (disc, cartridge, card
below, “Setting Protection”).
 Insert a disc or card.
Protection of cartridge disc or card
Deleting All Titles
You can delete all titles on HDD or the single-sided DVD-RAM
at once.
Important: Once deleted, contents cannot be recovered.
[HDD] [RAM]
Perform preparation steps − of “Accessing the
Management Menus” ( left).
 Press [, ] to select “Delete all titles”, then press
[OK].
 Press [] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
 Press [] to select “Start”, then press [OK].
– A message appears when deleting is finished.
 Press [, ] to select “HDD Management”, “DVD
Management” or “Card Management”, then press
[OK].
Tips
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Naming Discs
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can give a name for the disc.
 [-R] Once a name is provided to a disc, it is not possible to
record still images to that disc.
Perform preparation steps − of “Accessing the
Management Menus” ( above).
 Press [, ] to select “Disc Name”, then press
[OK].
Entering Text ( 47).
Tips
 [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] With a finalised disc, the
name is displayed on the Top Menu.
 [+RW] The disc name is displayed only if you play the disc
on other equipment after creating top menu.
Setting Protection
[RAM]
Use to prevent accidental erasure of disc.
Perform preparation steps − of “Accessing the
Management Menus” ( above).
 Press [, ] to select “Disc Protection”, then press
[OK].
 Press [] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
 Press [OK] to complete.
Notes
 Deleting does not work if one or more titles are protected.
 Still picture data (JPEG), music data or computer data
cannot be deleted.
Formatting Discs or Cards
[HDD] [RAM[ [-RW‹V›] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
[+R] [+R]DL] (New disc only)
[SD]
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM
recordable on recording equipment.
You can record or edit after formatting the finalised DVD-RW.
Important: Once formatted, contents cannot be recovered.
Perform preparation steps − of “Accessing the
Management Menus” ( left).
 Press [, ] to select “Format HDD”, “Format
Disc” or “Format Card”, then press [OK].
 Press [] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
 Press [] to select “Start”, then press [OK].
– Formatting starts ([RAM] may take up to a maximum of
70 minutes).
– A message appears when formatting is finished.
 Press [OK] to complete.
Notes
 Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while formatting.
This can render the disc or the card unusable.
 When a disc or card has been formatted using this unit, it
may not be possible to use it on any other equipment.
 [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] Formatting cannot be performed.
 [-RW‹V›] [-RW‹VR›] You can format only as DVD-Video
format on this unit.
 [RAM[ [SD[ The disc or card cannot be formatted if the
write protect tab or switch ( above) is switched to
“PROTECT” or “LOCK”. Release the protection to
continue.
 The message “Unable to format” appears when trying to
format discs the unit cannot use.
68
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 68
2009/04/27 11:45:46
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can select the background that will be displayed as the
DVD-Video top menu after finalising or creating Top Menu
([+RW]).
Perform preparation steps − of “Accessing the
Management Menus” ( 68).
 Press [, ] to select “Top Menu”, then press [OK].
 Press [, , , ] to select the background, then
press [OK].
Top Menu List
1
2
Display after finalising
Thumbnail
(Still picture)
Title Name
4
5
3
6
01
7
8
9
 You can change thumbnails displayed in the top menu.
( 49, Change Thumbnail)]
 [-R] This function cannot be used for discs with still images
recorded on them.
Selecting Whether to Show the Top Menu
First —Auto-Play Select
Notes
 Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while finalising. This
can render the disc unusable.
 When finalising a high-speed recording compatible disc,
it may take longer than displayed on the confirmation
screen (approximately 4 times longer).
 After finalising
– [-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] The disc becomes play-only and
you can no longer record or edit it.
– [-RW‹V›] You can record and edit the disc after formatting
although it becomes play-only after finalising.
– When copying in high speed, chapters will be
replicated.
– The disc finalised on the unit may not be playable
on other players depending on the condition of the
recording.
– There is a pause of several seconds between titles and
chapters during playback.
– [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] Chapters are created automatically ([-R]
[-RW‹V›] about 5-minute chapters [+R] about 8-minute
chapters), if
– the titles were directly recorded to the disc.
– the titles were copied using any mode other than the
high speed mode.

This time varies greatly depending on the condition
and mode of recording.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Tips
Before finalising a disc, select whether the top menu shows
after finalising.
 After you have finished recording or copying and try to
eject the disc, a screen asking if you want to finalise the
disc appears ( 26).
Perform preparation steps − of “Accessing the
Management Menus” ( 68).
 Press [, ] to select “Auto-Play Select”, then
press [OK].
 Press [, ] to select “Top Menu” or “Title 1”, then
press [OK].
 Top Menu:
The Top Menu appears first.
 Title 1:
The disc content is played without displaying the Top
Menu.
 [-R] This function cannot be used for discs with still images
recorded on them.
Finalising
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
You can play these discs on compatible DVD players by
finalising it on the unit, effectively making it into DVD-Video that
complies with DVD-Video standards. The menu you create with
the unit can also be used on most DVD players.
Perform preparation steps − of “Accessing the
Management Menus” ( 68).
Create Top Menu
[+RW]
+RW discs contain no Top Menu data. Top Menu is a
convenient function. We recommend you create the menu
before playing a +RW disc on other equipment.
Perform preparation steps − of “Accessing the
Management Menus” ( 68).
 Press [, ] to select “Create Top Menu”, then
press [OK].
 Press [] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
 Press [] to select “Start”, then press [OK].
– “Create Top Menu” cannot be cancelled once started.
– “Create Top Menu” takes a few minutes.
 Press [OK] to complete.
Setting Menus
Selecting the background style—Top Menu
Notes
 Recording or editing on the disc may delete the Top
Menu. In that case, create the Top Menu again.
 You cannot use the Top Menu for playing on this unit.
 Press [, ] to select “Finalise”, then press [OK].
 Press [] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
 Press [] to select “Start”, then press [OK].
– Finalising starts and cannot be cancelled (may take
up to 15 minutes) ([-R]DL] [+R]DL] up to 60 minutes)
– A message appears when finalising is finished.
 Press [OK] to complete.
69
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 69
2009/04/27 11:45:47
Setup Menu
Channel Settings
You can change the unit’s settings using Setup menu.
FUNCTION MENU

Others
Setup
TION MENU
With the unit stopped
 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
 Press [, ] to select “Others” and press [OK].

C
FUN
Accessing the Setup Menu
( left, Accessing the Setup Menu)
All factory default settings are indicated with “Underlined” text.
Remain 30:00 SP
HDD
Playback
Playlists
Flexible Rec
DV Auto Rec
HDD Management
Setup
Recording
Delete
Copy
TV Guide
Tuning
, select “Tuning”
Others
Drive Select
OK
Setup
RETURN
 Press [, ] to select “Setup”, then press [OK].
 Press [, ] to select a menu, then press [] to
go to the item list.
Menus
Setup
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others
Items
Options
Remote Control
Clock
Owner ID
Setting for Standby
DivX Registration
System Update
Initialize
TAB
DVD 1
SELECT
RETURN
 Press [, ] to select an item to change, then
press [OK].
 Press [, ] to select the option, then press
[OK].
Notes
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ]. Even if you have changed an
option, the change is not activated until you press [OK].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
TAB
,  select item
OK
English
English
SELECT
RETURN
Favourites Edit
You can create four Favourites of channels for making viewing
and recording easier. Editing these Favourites does not affect the
channel setting itself.
 Timer recording may not work correctly if you edit the Favourites
during timer recording standby.
 Channel numbers cannot be changed, due to broadcast
restrictions.
Setup
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others
 Changed settings remain intact even when switching
the unit to standby mode.
Tips
Favourites Edit
DVB Auto Setup
DVB Manual Tuning
Add New DVB Channels
Signal Condition
DVB Preferred Multi Audio
DVB Preferred Subtitles

Favourites Edit
DVB Auto Setup
DVB Manual Tuning
Add New DVB Channels
Signal Condition
DVB Preferred Multi Audio
DVB Preferred Subtitles
Favourites Editor
English
English
TAB
SELECT
OK
RETURN
All Channels
1 BBC ONE Wales
2 BBC 2W
3 BBC THREE
4 BBC FOUR
5 CBeebies
6 BBC PARLMNT
7 Community
8 CBBC Channel
9 1Xtra BBC
Favourite Select
SELECT
RETURN
Favourite 1
Add
Add All
Page +
Page –
To select the Favourite
Press the “Green” button.
To add channels to a Favourite
1 Press [, ] to select the channel in the “All Channels”
column to add, then press the “Yellow” button.
 Repeat this step to add other channels.
 Press the “Blue” button to add all the available channels to the
Favourite. (Only when no channels have been added to the
Favourite.)
2 Press [OK] to save the Favourite.
To change the order of channels of a Favourite
1 Press [].
2 Press [, ] to select the channel in the “Favourite” column
to move, then press the “Green” button.
3 Press [, ] to select the new position of the channel, then
press the “Green” button.
 Repeat the steps 2–3 to move other channels.
4 Press [OK] to save the Favourite.
To delete channels on a Favourite
1 Press [].
2 Press [, ] to select the channel in the “Favourite” column,
then press the “Yellow” button.
 Repeat this step to delete other channels.
 Press the “Blue” button to delete all the channels from the
Favourite.
3 Press [OK] to save the Favourite.
Deleting a channel from a Favourite does not affect the channel
itself.
You can still select the channel from the “All Channels” column.
70
To change the name of a Favourite in the “Favourite” column
1 Press [].
2 Press the “Red” button. ( 47, Entering Text)

When the station name of the “All Channels” column is
highlighted
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 70
2009/04/27 11:45:47
Tips
Tips
To browse through the list
Press [  CH].
To cancel in middle
Press [RETURN ].
The channels found before stopping are not saved.
DVB Auto Setup
You can restart auto channel setting for digital terrestrial channels if
the setup ( 13) fails for some reason.
However, if you perform “DVB Auto Setup”, all channel settings and
all the timer recording programmes are deleted. (All the settings
except for the ratings level, ratings password, Owner ID, Clock and
remote control code return to the factory preset.) Recordings on the
HDD are not be deleted.
When the confirmation screen appears
Press [] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
Signal Condition
You can check the quality and strength of digital broadcast signals.
Realign the aerial if you are receiving a poor signal.
When “Signal Condition” is displayed in grey and cannot be
selected:
1 Press [EXIT] to exit the screen.
2 Press [  CH] to select a digital channel. “D” appears on the unit’s
display.
3 Display the Setup menu again.
Setup
Tips
 You can also use the following method to restart Auto-Setup.
When the unit is turned on and stopped, press and hold
[CH ] and [CH ] on the main unit simultaneously for about
5 seconds.
–Auto-Setup screen appears.
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others
Favourites Edit
DVB Auto Setup
DVB Manual Tuning
Add New DVB Channels
Signal Condition
DVB Preferred Multi Audio
DVB Preferred Subtitles
English
English
DVB Signal Condition
DVB Channel
TAB
SELECT
OK
RETURN
0
Signal Strength
0
RETURN
DVB Manual Tuning
You can set channels manually if the “DVB Auto Setup” could not be
completed successfully.
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others
Favourites Edit
DVB Auto Setup
DVB Manual Tuning
Add New DVB Channels
Signal Condition
DVB Preferred Multi Audio
DVB Preferred Subtitles
738.0 MHz
10
10
New
Type
2–5 (display orange)
TAB
Over 5 (display green)
RETURN
OK
TV: 0
Radio: 0
RETURN
1 Press [, ] to select the channel you want to set.
– Select the channel by checking the signal strength and signal
quality displays.
[Refer to “Signal Condition” ( right) for signal strength and signal
quality.]
DVB Manual Tuning
2 Press [OK] to start scan.
The set channel is displayed in the
table.
Frequency
[CH54]
0
Signal Quality
0
Signal Strength
No.
Channel Name
Type
BBC ONE Wales
BBC 2W
BBC NEWS 24
BBC Radio Wales
ITV
TV
TV
TV
Radio
TV
1
2
3
4
5
TV: 15
Radio: 4
738,0 MHz
10
10
New
-
Data: 0
8 DVB channels found.
START SCAN
CH
RETURN
3 Press [EXIT], then press [ CH] to check that applicable
channels have been selected.
Add New DVB Channels
You can search for newly added digital terrestrial channels to
receive.
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others
Favourites Edit
DVB Auto Setup
DVB Manual Tuning
Add New DVB Channels
Signal Condition
DVB Preferred Multi Audio
DVB Preferred Subtitles
TAB
Add New DVB Channels
Scan
CH
English
English
27
27
27
27
The signal quality is so poor that there
may be interference in the pictures and
sound.
The signal quality is basically adequate,
but brief interference in the pictures and
sound is possible in isolated case.
Optimum picture and sound quality.
Data: 0
START SCAN
CH
Setup
Signal Quality
Below 2 (display red)
English
English
SELECT
10
Channel +
Channel –
The quality and strength of the signal are shown.
Press [  CH] to select the channel.
DVB Manual Tuning
Frequency
[CH54]
0
Signal Quality
0
Signal Strength
No.
Channel Name
10
CH 21
Channel Name
Type
BBC ONE Wales
TV
TV
TV
Radio
BBC 2W
BBC NEWS 24
BBC Radio Wales
68
Quality
Signal Strength
The display for signal strength is grey. “0” means signal strength 0%,
“10” means signal strength 100%.
 If the signal is too strong, the display will change from grey to red.
Reduce the signal amplification at your aerial.
 When the signal is weak:
– check that the aerial is correctly positioned.
– adjust the aerial reception with “DVB Manual Tuning” in the Setup
menu ( left).
– check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly
broadcasting.
DVB Preferred Multi Audio
Setting Menus
Setup
[CH54] 20 BBC ONE Wales
Signal Quality
Choose the audio language for digital broadcast.
If the selected language is not available, then the original language
will be selected.
[English] [Welsh] [Gaelic]
DVB Preferred Subtitles
Choose the subtitle language for digital broadcast.
If the selected language is not available, then the original language
will be selected.
[English] [Welsh] [Gaelic]
[English for hearing impaired]
[Welsh for hearing impaired]
[Gaelic for hearing impaired]
9
9
9
9
SELECT
OK
RETURN
TV: 15
Radio: 4
Data: 0
Searching...
RETURN
– The unit starts searching for newly available digital terrestrial
channels. This takes about 5 minutes.
– The bar over the table shows you the search progress. At the end of
the search, the number of found new digital stations appears.
– “No new DVB channels found.”, is displayed when no new channels
can be found.
Press [OK] to save the newly found channels.
71
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 71
2009/04/27 11:45:47
Playback/Recording Settings
C
FUN

TION MENU
Others

Settings for Recording
Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Setup
Recording time in EP mode
( 70, Accessing the Setup Menu)
All factory default settings are indicated with “Underlined” text.
Chapter Creation
Disc
, select “Disc”
Setup
Select the maximum number of hours for recording in EP mode.
[EP (6Hours)] You can record for 6 hours on an unused 4.7 GB
disc.
[EP (8Hours)] You can record for 8 hours on an unused 4.7 GB
disc.

,  select item
OK
Settings for Playback
Settings for Recording
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others
TAB
SELECT
RETURN
Settings for Playback
Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Ratings
Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play.
Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit password with the
numbered buttons when the password screen is shown.
Do not forget your password.
 Setting ratings (When level 8 is selected)
[8 No Limit] All DVD-Video can be played.
[1] to [7]
Prohibits play of DVD-Video with corresponding
ratings recorded on them.
[0 Lock All] Prohibits play of all DVD-Video.
 Changing settings (When level 0 to 7 is selected)
[Unlock Recorder] [Change Password] [Change Level]
[Temporary Unlock]
Soundtrack
[English] [German] [French] [Italian] [Spanish] [Original]
[Other ]
Subtitle
[Automatic] [English] [German] [French] [Italian] [Spanish]
[Other ]
Set the automatic Chapter Creation method. ( 50)
[Automatic]
[5 minutes]
[Off]
No chapter start points are set.
Recording Format
Titles recorded to the HDD with “Recording Format” set to “Video
format” can be copied to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVDVideo format), +R, +R DL and +RW using high speed mode.
However, aspect, etc. is restricted. ( 56, “Important”)
We recommend turning the setting “VR format” if high speed copy
to DVD-R, etc. is not necessary when recording a programme.
This setting is effective when recording from a television
programme or external equipment (including DV equipment), or
when copying from a finalised DVD-Video disc.
[VR format]
High speed copy from HDD is possible only to
DVD-RAM.
[Video format] You can high-speed copy to DVD-R, etc. Press
[, ] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
You are no longer able to switch the audio when
watching a programme on an input channel on the
TV connected to this unit (e.g., AV1, etc).
In some cases, copying to DVD-R, etc. using
the high speed mode does not work ( 56,
“Important”)
DVD Speed for High Speed Copy
Select the speed of high-speed copying (When using high-speed
copy compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R, +R 8X or +RW 4X discs).
[Maximum]
[Normal (Silent)] Selecting “Normal (Silent)” means the noise
generated by this unit is less than “Maximum”,
however the time required for copying will double
(approximately).
Menus
[English] [German] [French] [Italian] [Spanish] [Other ]
Notes
[DVD-V] Choose the language for audio, subtitles and disc
menus. If a language which is not recorded is selected, or
if languages are already fixed on the disc, the language set
as the default on the disc will be played instead.
[Original]
The original language of each disc will be
selected.
[Other ] This is the language code setting. Input a
code number with the numbered buttons
( 86, Language code list).
[Automatic]
If the language selected for “Soundtrack”
is not available, subtitles of that language
will automatically appear if available on the
disc.
72
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 72
2009/04/27 11:45:47
Picture and Sound Settings
Digital Audio Output
C
FUN


Others
Change the settings when you have connected equipment through
the unit’s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal ( 80).
Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Setup
TION MENU
PCM Down Conversion
Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz.
Signals are converted to 48 kHz despite the above settings if the
signals have a sampling frequency of over 96 kHz, or the disc has
copy protection.
[On]
Signals are converted to 48 kHz. (Choose when the
connected equipment cannot process signals with
sampling frequency of 96 kHz.)
[Off]
Signals are output as 96 kHz. (Choose when the
connected equipment can process signals with sampling
frequency of 96 kHz.)
( 70, Accessing the Setup Menu)
All factory default settings are indicated with “Underlined” text.
Picture
Setup
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others
Comb Filter
Still Mode
Seamless Play
TAB

,  select item
OK
Off
Automatic
On
Dolby Digital
Choose whether to output by “Bitstream”, which processes Dolby
Digital signals on other connected equipment, or to convert the
signals to “PCM” (2ch) on the unit before output.
SELECT
[Bitstream] When connected to equipment with a built-in Dolby
Digital decoder.
[PCM]
When connected to equipment without a built-in Dolby
Digital decoder.
RETURN
Comb Filter
Select the picture sharpness when recording.
The setting is fixed with “On” if you set “TV System” to “NTSC”
( 75).
[On]
Select it to record clear picture.
[Off]
Normally, use this setting.
DTS
Choose whether to output by “Bitstream”, which processes DTS
signals on other connected equipment or to convert the signals to
“PCM” (2ch) on the unit before output.
[Bitstream]
Still Mode
Select the type of picture shown when you pause play ( 96, Frame
and Field).
[Automatic]
[Field]
Select if jittering occurs when “Automatic” is selected.
[Frame]
Select if you cannot see small text or fine patterns
clearly when “Automatic” is selected.
[PCM]
MPEG
Choose whether to output by “Bitstream”, which processes
MPEG audio signals on other connected equipment or to convert
the signals to “PCM” (2ch) on the unit before output.
[Bitstream]
When connected to equipment with a built-in
MPEG decoder.
[PCM]
When connected to equipment without a built-in
MPEG decoder.
Seamless Play
Select the play mode between playlist chapter segments and
partially deleted titles.
[On]
The chapters in playlists are played seamlessly. This does
not work when there are several audio types included on the
playlist and when using Quick View (Play ×1.3). Additionally,
the positioning of chapter segments may change slightly.
[Off]
The points where chapters in playlists change are played
accurately, but the picture may freeze for a moment.
Audio Mode for XP Recording
Choose the audio type when recording or copying with XP mode.
[Dolby Digital] ( 96)
[LPCM] ( 96)
 The picture quality of LPCM recordings may be lower than that of
normal XP mode recordings.
 The audio recording becomes Dolby Digital even if you selected
LPCM when using a recording mode other than XP.
Sound
, select “Sound”
Setup
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others

,  select item
OK
Audio Mode for DV Input
Dynamic Range Compression
Off
M1
Bilingual Auto Selection
Digital Audio Output
Audio Mode for XP Recording Dolby Digital
Audio Mode for DV Input Stereo 1
TAB
You can select the kind of audio when recording from the unit’s DV
IN terminal ( 29).
[Stereo 1] Records audio (L1, R1)
[Stereo 2] Records added audio such as narration (L2, R2)
subsequent to original recording.
[Mix]
Records both Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.
When recording bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in
advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” ( left).
SELECT
RETURN
Dynamic Range Compression
[DVD-V] (Dolby Digital only)
Change the dynamic range (
[On] [Off]
When connected to equipment with a built-in DTS
decoder.
When connected to equipment without a built-in
DTS decoder.

96) for easier listening in low volume.
Bilingual Audio Selection
When recording bilingual programmes from equipment connected to
the DV IN terminal of this unit, select whether to record the main or
secondary audio type.
[M 1] [M 2]
Setting Menus
, select “Picture”
Incorrect settings can cause noise to be output which can be
harmful to your ears and speakers, and audio will not be recorded
properly on media such as mini discs.
Refer to the operating instructions for connected devices to verify
whether or not they can decode each of the audio formats.
73
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 73
2009/04/27 11:45:47
Display and Connection Settings
C
FUN


Others
Connection
Setup
TION MENU
, select “Connection”
Setup
( 70, Accessing the Setup Menu)
All factory default settings are indicated with “Underlined” text.
Display
, select “Display”
Setup
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others

,  select item
OK
On-Screen Messages 5 sec.
Bright
FL Display
New Channel Message Automatic
On
Screen Saver
Off
FUNCTION MENU Display
SELECT
TAB
Choose the approximate time until the digital channel information
screen ( 46) disappears automatically.
The length of time the Control Panel ( 45) is displayed can also be
changed, but “Off” does not work.
[Off]: The digital channel information is not displayed.
[3 sec.] [5 sec.] [7 sec.] [10 sec.]
FL Display
Changes the brightness of the unit’s display.
Regardless of the setting, when “Power Save” ( 76) is “On” and
this unit is turned off, the unit’s display is turned off.
[Bright]
[Dim]
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others
TV Aspect
Progressive
TV System
HDMI Settings
AV 1 Output
AV 2 Settings
16:9
Off
PAL
RGB 2
SELECT
TAB
RETURN
TV Aspect
This setting needs to be changed when connected to a 4:3 standard
aspect TV.
[16:9] [4:3] [Letterbox]
Notes
Aspect 4:3/16:9
4:3
When a new DVB channel is added, this unit will be informed
automatically. Then the confirmation message appears. If you select
“Yes” on the display, Auto-Setup starts (all channel settings are
deleted. The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.).
[Automatic]
[Off]
The Channel Messages are not shown.
Screen Saver
When this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes
while the screen is being displayed, the screen saver is
displayed. To return to the previous screen, press [OK].
[Off]
FUNCTION MENU Display
When the unit is turned on, the FUNCTION MENU will be
displayed. ( 43)
[Off]
16:9
4:3 standard aspect television 16:9 widescreen television
 16:9:
When connected to a 16:9 widescreen
television.
When connected to a 4:3
aspect television, side picture is
trimmed for 16:9 picture
( 96, Pan & Scan).
 4:3:
 Letterbox:
New Channel Message
[On]
,  select item
RETURN
On-Screen Messages
[On]

OK
When connected to a 4:3
aspect television,
widescreen picture is
shown in the letterbox
style ( 96).
Progressive
You can enjoy progressive video by connecting this unit’s
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals to an LCD/plasma
television or LCD projector compatible with progressive scan
( 97).
Before this setting, set “AV1 Output” to “Video (with
component)” or “S Video (with component)” ( 75)
[On]
[Off]
Output becomes progressive.
This setting is fixed with “Off” and there is no output from
the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals if you set “AV1
Output” to “RGB 1 (without component)” or “RGB 2 (without
component)” ( 75).
Notes
 When connected to a regular television (CRT: Cathode
ray tube) or a multi-system television using PAL mode,
even if it is progressive compatible, progressive output
can cause some flickering. Turn off “Progressive” if this
occurs.
 Picture will not be displayed correctly if connected to an
incompatible television.
74
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 74
2009/04/27 11:45:48
Change this setting if you connect an NTSC television or to record
NTSC video from another source.
1. Press [, ] to select the TV System, then press [OK].
[PAL]
– Select when connecting to a PAL or Multi-system
television. Programmes recorded using NTSC are played
as PAL 60.
– Select to record television programmes and PAL input
from other equipment.
– [HDD] Select when playing a PAL input title recorded on
the HDD.
[NTSC]
– Select when connecting to an NTSC television.
Television programmes cannot be recorded properly.
– Select to record NTSC input from other equipment.
– [HDD] Select when playing an NTSC input title recorded
on the HDD.
The confirmation screen appears.
2. Press [] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
Tips
To change the setting all at once (PALNTSC)
While stopped, press and hold [] and [ OPEN/CLOSE] on the
main unit simultaneously for about 5 seconds.
AV1 Output
Set according to the terminal of the connected TV.
Select “Video (with component)” or “S Video (with component)” for
component output (progressive output).
[Video (with component)]
Select when a TV is connected that can receive a composite signal.
[S Video (with component)]
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an S Video signal.
[RGB 1 (without component)]
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal.
If you always would like to view the picture from the unit in RGB
signal, select this mode. The TV screen will automatically switch to
display the picture from the unit when the unit is turned on.
[RGB 2 (without component)]
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal.
If you would like to switch to display the picture from the unit only
when playback or viewing menus, select this mode.
 If this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, you cannot select
“RGB 1 (without component)” or “RGB 2 (without component)”.
AV2 Settings
Set to match the connected equipment.
 Press [OK] to show the following settings.
AV2 Input
Notes
Set to “RGB/Video” or “RGB” when receiving or recording RGB
output from external equipment.
[RGB/Video] The unit automatically detects whether the input
signal from the AV2 terminal is an RGB signal or
other signals and makes settings.
[RGB]
[Video]
[S Video]
 This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have
PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes
can be recorded onto the HDD.)
 If “NTSC” has been selected, the TV Guide system cannot be used.
 If the current “TV System” does not match the “TV System” of a
disc or a title recorded on the HDD:
– the title cannot be played.
– the disc cannot be played during recording or timer recording
standby.
It is recommended “TV System” be set to match the discs
or title before playing them. Also note that the “TV System”
setting should be changed back to the previous setting after the
playback.
Ext Link
This setting cannot be made when the “TV System” is set to
“NTSC” ( left)
[Ext Link 1] When this unit is connected to a digital satellite
receiver with a 21-pin Scart cable and this unit
receives a control signal.
Start and stop timings of recording are controlled by
the control signal.
[Ext Link 2] When external equipment with a timer function is
connected.
Recording is continued while the image signal is
being sent to the unit from the external equipment.
Recording is stopped when the image signal is
halted by turning the external equipment off.
HDMI Settings1
 Press [OK] to show the following settings.
HDMI Video Format2
You can only select items compatible with the connected
equipment. If you are concerned about output picture quality, it
may be improved by changing the setting.
– To enjoy High Quality Video up-converted to 1080p, you need to
connect the unit directly to 1080p compatible HDTV. If this unit is
connected to an HDTV through other equipment, it must also be
1080p compatible.
[576i/480i] [576p/480p]3 [720p] [1080i]
[1080p]
When setting video output to “1080p”, we
recommend using High Speed HDMI Cables that
have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover) and are
less than 5 meters to prevent video distortion etc.
[Automatic]4 Automatically selects the output resolution best
suited to the connected television (1080p, 1080i,
720p, 576p/480p or 576i/480i).
Depending on the connected equipment, some items may be shaded
in grey on the display and cannot be selected, or you may not be
able to change the settings.
2
Choose the setting to suit your TV and preference.
3
[EX79] The default setting
4
[EX89] The default setting
1
Setting Menus
TV System
Aspect for 4:3 Video
To play a 4:3 title when connected with an HDMI cable, set how
to show pictures on a 16:9 widescreen television. 4:3 picture from
HDMI output will be slightly smaller than that from the other outputs,
e.g. Scart and component, this is not a malfunction of the unit.
[4:3] Picture output expands left or right.
[16:9] Picture is output as original aspect with side
panels.
Digital Audio Output
[HDMI and Optical]
[Optical Only]
Select when this unit is connected to an
amplifier with an optical digital audio cable
( 80) and connected to a TV with an HDMI
cable ( 80) and you want to enjoy the highest
quality of audio from discs.
VIERA Link
[On]
[Off] Select when you do not want to use “HDAVI Control”.
75
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 75
2009/04/27 11:45:48
System Settings
System Update
C
FUN

Others

Setup
TION MENU
( 70, Accessing the Setup Menu)
All factory default settings are indicated with “Underlined” text.
Others
, select “Others”

,  select item
OK
Setup
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others
Remote Control
Clock
Owner ID
Setting for Standby
DivX Registration
System Update
Initialize
DVD 1
In order to update this unit, the TV Guide download, and support
system changes made by broadcasts, this unit periodically performs
software updates.
 Press [OK] to show the following settings.
 Update data and TV Guide download information are sent by an
unscheduled digital broadcast. In order to receive these updates, you
must be able to receive digital broadcasts.
 An update will take approximately 60 minutes. While the update is in
progress, “SW-DL” appears on the unit’s display.
You cannot operate the unit until the update is complete.
Removing the AC mains lead while the update is in progress may
damage the unit.
 An TV Guide download will take approximately 30 minutes.
While the TV Guide download is in progress, “GUIDE” appears on
the unit’s display. The TV Guide download can be interrupted by
switching on the unit.
 To avoid hearing the startup sound of System Update for the unit,
perform the following steps.
– Select the time for Software Update ( below, TV Guide/
Software search period).
– Set “TV Guide Download in Standby” and “Software Update in
Standby” ( below) to “Off”, and update manually ( below,
Software Update Search Now).
TV Guide Download in Standby
SELECT
[On]
TAB
RETURN
When the unit is turned off, TV Guide data is downloaded
automatically.
[Off]
Remote Control (
86)
[DVD 1] [DVD 2] [DVD 3]
Clock (
Software Update in Standby
[On]
You can perform the unit updates automatically when the
unit is turned off.
[Off]
14)
TV Guide/Software search period
Power Save
Selects the time to automatically perform TV Guide download and
updates when the unit is turned off. This can only be set when “TV
Guide Download in Standby” and “Software Update in Standby” is
set to “On”.
 If there is a programmed recording set for the time you have
selected, the programmed recording will be given priority.
When the GUIDE Plus+ system is not available
[Automatic] The unit will give priority to searching for update data
at midnight.
[02:00–06:00] [06:00–10:00] [10:00–14:00]
[14:00–18:00] [18:00–22:00] [22:00–02:00]
When the GUIDE Plus+ system is available
[Automatic]
[Daytime]
Updating is executed during daytime (06:00–22:00).
[On]
Software Update Search Now
Owner ID (
13)
In order to prevent another person from using this unit if it is stolen,
you can set a PIN number and input your personal information.
Once the PIN number has been set, you cannot return to the factory
preset. Make sure not to forget this.
 PIN number
 Name
 House No.
 Postcode
Setting for Standby
 Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Power consumption is minimized when the unit is turned
to standby ( 98).
[Off]
This sets to Quick Start Mode.
 Refer to the chart for the Power Save function features ( 13)
when the unit is turned off.
Auto Standby
Set the time to automatically turn the unit off.
After the unit has finished operating, the unit will be turned off
once the set time has passed.
[2 hours] [4 hours] [6 hours]
[Off]
The unit will not automatically turn off.
DivX Registration
You need this registration code to purchase and play DivX Videoon-Demand (VOD) content ( 39).
Start the search for new software manually.
A new software version is announced by a message. Do not turn
this unit off during the update. This could result in the loss of data.
A message shows that the update has finished.
 If applicable update data is found, press [, ] to select “Yes”,
then press [OK].
GUIDE Plus+ System Information
You can check the condition of GUIDE Plus+ system of this unit.
Post Code
You can input the postal code which is nessesary to download area
specific information of GUIDE Plus+ system.
Initialize
 Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Shipping Condition
This returns Setup menus to default settings, except for the ratings
level, ratings password, Owner ID and clock settings.
[Yes] [No]
 The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.
 Recordings on the HDD will not be deleted.
Default Settings
This returns Setup menus to default settings, except for the tuning
settings, clock settings, disc language settings, ratings level,
ratings password, Owner ID and remote control code.
[Yes] [No]
 The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.
 Recordings on the HDD will not be deleted.
76
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 76
2009/04/27 11:45:48
Other Settings
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN ] at the same time
until “X HOLD” appears on the unit’s display.
If you press a button while the Child Lock is on, “X HOLD”
appears on the unit’s display and operation is impossible.
Tips
To cancel the Child Lock
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN ] at the same time until
“X HOLD” disappears.
Using the Unit’s Remote Control to
Operate the TV
You can configure the remote control TV operation buttons to
turn the television on/off, change the television input mode,
select the television channel and change the television volume.

DRIVE
SELECT
TV

VOL
CH
AV
TV operation
buttons
PAGE
1 2 3
 Point the remote control at the TV.
 While pressing and holding [TV],
enter the code from the table below using the
numbered buttons.
e.g., 01: press [0]
[1]
 Test the TV functions of the remote control for
operability.
– If the functions do not work, repeat steps  to 
using different codes, if available. Some TVs may not
be compatible with the unit’s remote control.
Remote Control Codes for the TV
Manufacturer
Panasonic
AIWA
AKAI
BEJING
BEKO
BENQ
BP
BRANDT
BUSH
CENTREX
CHANGHONG
CURTIS
DAEWOO
DESMET
DUAL
ELEMIS
Code No.
01 / 02 / 03 / 04
35
27 / 30
33
05 / 71 / 72 / 73 / 74
58 / 59
09
10 / 15
05
66
69
05
64 / 65
05
05
05
Code No.
10 / 34
61
21
53
63 / 67
05 / 50 / 51
05
36
09
52
05 / 22 / 23 / 40 / 41
05
30
25
49
17 / 30 / 39 / 70
52
45
62
05 / 50 / 51
07 / 46
52
05 / 28
05 / 19 / 20 / 47
24
36
33
25 / 26 / 27 / 60 / 61
10
45
30 / 39 / 70
05
49 / 69
41 / 48 / 64
05 / 06 / 46
05
37 / 38
52
05
05
10
26
32 / 42 /43 / 65 / 68
05
21 / 54 / 55 / 56
05 / 29 / 30
05 / 69 / 75 / 76 / 77 / 78
05 / 25
18
09
05
08
31 / 33 / 66 / 67 / 69
10 / 11 / 12 / 13 / 14
52
52
10 / 15 / 44
16 / 57
05
18 / 41
Setting Menus
The Child Lock deactivates all buttons on the unit and remote
control. Use it to prevent other people from operating the unit.
Manufacturer
FERGUSON
FINLUX
FISHER
FUJITSU
FUNAI
GOLDSTAR
GOODMANS
GRADIENTE
GRUNDIG
HIKONA
HITACHI
INNO HIT
IRRADIO
ITT
JINGXING
JVC
KDS
KOLIN
KONKA
LG
LOEWE
MAG
METZ
MITSUBISHI
MIVAR
NEC
NOBLEX
NOKIA
NORDMENDE
OLEVIA
ONWA
ORION
PEONY
PHILCO
PHILIPS
PHONOLA
PIONEER
PROVIEW
PYE
RADIOLA
SABA
SALORA
SAMSUNG
SANSUI
SANYO
SCHNEIDER
SEG
SELECO
SHARP
SIEMENS
SINUDYNE
SONY
TCL
TELEFUNKEN
TEVION
TEX ONDA
THOMSON
TOSHIBA
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
YAMAHA
Other Settings
Child Lock
77
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 77
2009/04/27 11:45:48
Additional Connections
Using a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable
– You can use a variety of Q Link functions by connecting the unit to a Q Link compatible television ( 44).
– You can enjoy high-quality viewing by connecting the unit to an RGB compatible television.
“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu is set to “RGB 1 (without component)” or “RGB 2 (without component)” (
Make “AV2 Input” settings in the Setup menu ( 75).
75).
Use of the RF coaxial cable
 Keep the RF coaxial cables as far away as possible from other cables.
 Do not roll up the RF coaxial cables.
 Before connection, turn off the mains for all connected equipment and read the appropriate operating
instructions.
Connect AC mains lead only after all other connections are complete.
BE SURE TO READ THE CAUTION FOR AC MAINS LEAD ON PAGE 3.
Adding a VCR: Connecting to a Television and a Video Cassette Recorder
RF coaxial cable
You can enjoy
high-quality picture
by adding
the HDMI cable
connection 12
21-pin Scart cable
TV
HDMI cable
RF IN
To the aerial
AV
HDMI IN
This unit
RF IN
AV1(TV)
RF OUT
RF IN
The RF coaxial cable cannot
be used for showing pictures
from the unit. The unit must
be connected using another
method, e.g.21-pin Scart cable
to show pictures from the unit
on the television set.
AV2 (EXT) HDMI AV
OUT
AV
RF OUT
VCR
To record from a VCR
Refer to “Recording from an External Device” (
29).
78
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 78
2009/04/27 11:45:49
 You can connect this unit to a TV using the audio/video (AV) cable, S-Video cable or component video cables instead of the 21pin Scart cable ( 10, 11, 78).
 Connect to terminals of the same colour.
Using an Audio/Video Cable (not included)
Using an S Video Cable (not included)
The S VIDEO OUT terminal achieves a more vivid picture
than the VIDEO OUT terminal. (Actual results depend on the
television).
TV
TV
S Video cable
AUDIO IN
R
L
VIDEO
IN
AUDIO IN
R
L
Audio cable
S VIDEO
IN
This unit
VIDEO
L
L
R
AUDIO
R
AUDIO
S VIDEO
This unit
Using Component Video Cables (not included)
The COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals on this unit can be used for either interlace or progressive output (
purer picture than the S VIDEO OUT terminal.
TV
Notes
 If you have a regular television (CRT: cathode ray
tube)
Use component output with progressive “Off” (Factory
setting
74), even if it is progressive compatible,
because progressive output can cause some flickering.
This is the same for multi-system televisions using PAL
mode.
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
Y
AUDIO IN
R
L
PR
PB
CRT
This unit
Y
PB
PR
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
97) to provide a
VIDEO
L
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
R
AUDIO
This unit
Use component output
with progressive “Off”.
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
Reference
Component video cables
Audio cable
 For progressive output (
74)
79
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 79
2009/04/27 11:45:49
Additional Connections
You can improve sound quality by connecting this unit to
an amplifier or system component using the audio cable
or the optical digital audio cable.
Connecting with an HDMI (High Definition
Multimedia Interface) Terminal
Using an Audio Cable (not included) for
Better Sound
When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an
uncompressed digital audio and video signal is
transmitted, enabling you to enjoy high quality, digital
video and audio with just one cable. When connecting to
an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television),
the output can be switched to 1080p, 1080i or 720p HD
video.
 Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the
HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).
 When setting video output to “1080p”, please use the
HDMI cables 5.0 meters or less.
Use this connection to play sound through speakers
connected to an amplifier or system component.
 Connect to terminals of the same colour.
AUDIO IN
R
L
Amplifier
or
System Component
Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM” function
This unit
VIDEO
L
R
AUDIO
Using an Optical Digital Audio Cable (not
included) for Better Sound
This method allows you to enjoy multi-channel surround
sound on DVD-Video.
When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA)
or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control”
function, linked operations would be possible. [ 44,
Linked Operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI
ControlTM”/Q Link)]
 It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI
cable.
Recommended part number: RP-CDHG10 (1.0 m),
RP-CDHG15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHG20 (2.0 m), RPCDHG30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHG50 (5.0 m), etc.
 Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.
Using an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia
Interface) Cable (not included)
Amplifier or System Component
Receiver
OPTICAL IN
AV
HDMI OUT
HDMI IN
TV
Insert fully with this side up.
Do not bend cable sharply.
HDMI IN
This unit
This unit
AV1(TV)
HDMI AV OUT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
 Connect an amplifier or system component with a builtin Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG decoder.
 Adjust settings in “Digital Audio Output” ( 73).
Notes
 When this unit is connected to an amplifier with an optical digital
audio cable and connected to a television with an HDMI cable,
you can enjoy the highest quality of audio from the disc by setting
“Digital Audio Output” to “Optical Only” in the Setup menu ( 75).
In this case audio is only output from the amplifier not the
television.
 You cannot use DTS Digital Surround decoders not meant for
DVD.
 Before purchasing an optical digital audio cable, check the
terminal shape of the equipment to be connected.
80
Connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA)
If the 21-pin Scart cable is connected, the following
functions are available.
 Direct TV Recording ( 26)
 Watching Digital Satellite Programmes ( 19)
(In this case, make sure to switch the television input to “AV”.)
 Set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and Optical” (
(The default setting is “HDMI and Optical”.)
75).
Notes
 If connecting to equipment that is only compatible with 2 channel
audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down-mixed
( 96) and output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an
HDMI cable (some discs cannot be down-mixed).
 You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible
with HDCP.
For display units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital
Content Protection) that are equipped with a digital DVI input
terminal (PC monitors, etc.):
Depending on the unit, picture may not be displayed properly or
at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable (audio
cannot be output).
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 80
2009/04/27 11:45:49
Media Handling (Disc/USB Memory/SD Card)
Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are applicable to the DMR-EX89 model only.
Inserting Discs
Inserting/Removing the SD Card [EX89]
 Press [ OPEN/CLOSE] to open the tray.
– Insert a disc.
Insert label-up.
When the SD card slot indicator (“SD”) on the unit’s display is
flashing, the card is being read from or written to. Do not turn off the
unit or remove the card.
Such action may result in malfunction or loss of the card’s contents.
 Inserting foreign objects can cause a malfunction.
Inserting the card
Press on the centre of
the card until it clicks
into place.
Cartridge disc
If you are using
e.g.,
a miniSD card, a
miniSD
miniSDHC card, a
microSD card or a
microSDHC card,
insert it into the adaptor
that comes with the
card.
Insert and remove this
adaptor from the unit.
ADAPTER
Insert label-up with the arrow
facing in.
Insert fully.
 Press [ OPEN/CLOSE] to close tray.
Insert the card label up with
the cut-off corner on the
right.
Removing the card
 Press on the centre
of the card.
 Pull it straight out.
Notes
Automatic drive select function
[RAM] [Only for discs with the write-protect tab on the cartridge set to
“PROTECT” ( 68, Setting Protection)]
[DVD-V] [VCD]
 If the unit is recording to the HDD or stopped, it automatically
switches to the DVD drive when a disc is inserted.
 If you eject a disc and close the disc tray, the HDD drive is
automatically selected.
Inserting/Removing the USB memory
Disc and Card Care
[RAM] Use cartridges to protect them from scratches and dirt.
Holding a disc or card
Handle discs by the edges to avoid inadvertently scratching or getting
oil from your fingers on the disc. Do not touch the signal surface of
discs (the shiny side) or the terminal surface (the metal part) of SD
cards.
Cleaning discs or cards
Discs are not indestructible and occasionally dirt or condensation
may appear. Clean by gently wiping with a soft, dry lint-free cloth in a
straight line from the centre of the disc to the edge of the disc.
Return discs and SD cards to their cases when not in use; this helps
to protect against scratches and dirt.
Storing discs and cards
Inserting the USB memory
 Do not place or store discs and cards in the following locations:
– Direct sunlight
– Very dusty or humid areas
– Near a heat source
– Places that undergo extreme shifts in temperature (condensation
can occur)
– Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur
 Keep the Memory Card out of reach of children to prevent
swallowing.
 Before inserting any USB memory to this unit, ensure that the data
stored therein has been backed up.
 Check the orientation of the USB connector and insert it straight in.
 Insert an USB device while the unit is stopped, so the “USB device”
screen is displayed. Select an item, then press [OK] to switch to the
USB-related operations (
38, 63).
Discs to avoid
Removing the USB memory
 Complete all USB-related operations and pull the USB memory
straight out.
 If a USB memory being accessed is pulled out, then the data may be
damaged.
 Discs that are not perfectly circular in shape
 Warped discs, which may not balance properly in your unit, causing
improper operation or damage to the unit
 Cracked discs
 Discs with exposed adhesive (from removed stickers or labels, such
as may occur with rental discs or improperly cared-for discs that
were previously labeled or re-labeled)
Reference
 When using 8 cm DVD-RAM or 8 cm DVD-R, remove the
disc from the cartridge.
 It is not possible to record or play continuously from one
side of a double sided disc to the other. You will need to
eject the disc and turn it over.
81
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 81
2009/04/27 11:45:49
Frequently Asked Questions
Setup
How can I enjoy High Quality Video
up-converted to 1080p?
 Connect the unit to 1080p compatible HDTV using an HDMI cable.
Set “HDMI Video Format” in the Setup menu to “1080p”.
What equipment is necessary
to play multi-channel surround
sound?
 You cannot playback multi-channel sound on this unit without other
equipment. You must connect this unit with an HDMI cable or an optical
digital cable to an amplifier with a built-in (Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG)
decoder.
 You cannot directly connect to the unit. Connect through the amplifier, TV,
etc.
 If you have a regular television (CRT: cathode ray tube) we recommend
using the Scart terminal. You can enjoy high-quality RGB video from this
unit by connecting to an RGB compatible television.
If you have an LCD/plasma television or LCD projector compatible with
progressive scan, connect through the component video terminals for high
quality progressive video.
If you have a CRT television or a multi-system television using PAL
mode that is compatible with progressive scan, we cannot recommend
progressive output as some flickering can occur.
 All Panasonic televisions that have 625 (576)/50i · 50p, 525 (480)/60i ·
60p input terminals are compatible. Consult the manufacturer if you have
another brand of TV.
Can the headphones and speakers
be directly connected to the unit?
The television has a Scart terminal
and component video input
terminal. Which terminal should I
connect with?
Is my TV progressive output
compatible?
Discs
Can I play DVD-Video, and Video
CDs bought in another country?
Can a DVD-Video that does not
have a region number be played?
Please tell me about disc
compatibility with this unit.
Please tell me about CD-R and
CD-RW compatibility with this unit.
 You cannot play DVD-Video if their region number does not include “2” or
“ALL”. Refer to the disc’s jacket for more information.
 Discs either without region encoding or region code 2 will not play on this
unit.
 This unit records and plays DVD-RAM, DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, and +RW, and plays DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format).
However you cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this
unit (playback and copy are possible).
 This unit also records and plays high speed recording compatible discs.
 After recording but before finalising DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R,
+R DL and +RW:
– You may not be able to play and record discs on this unit after recording
them on other Panasonic products or other manufacturers’ equipment.
– You may not be able to play and record discs on other equipment after
recording them on this unit.
After finalising the disc, however, you will be able to play it on any DVDVideo compatible player.
 This unit plays CD-R/CD-RW discs which have been recorded in one of
the following standards:
CD-DA, Video CD, SVCD (conforming to IEC62107), DivX, MP3, WMA
and still pictures (JPEG). Close the session or finalise the disc after
recording. This unit can recognize up to 300 folders (groups or albums)
and 3000 files (tracks) on a disc with MP3/WMA or still pictures (JPEG).
 You cannot write to a CD-R or CD-RW with the unit.
DVB-T
Which aerial is suitable for
receiving digital terrestrial
broadcasts?
Can this unit receive or record High
Definition (HD) broadcasts?
 Any (terrestrial) roof aerial can be used. However, depending on the area
where you live, a new aerial may be necessary. Consult your local TV
aerial installer.
 No, this unit cannot receive or record High Definition (HD) broadcasts.
Page
12, 75
80
80
10, 11,
78, 79
−
Page
Cover
−
15, 16
98
−
16, 18
−
Page
−
−
82
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 82
2009/04/27 11:45:49
Is it possible to programme a
recording, with a start and end time
that are different from the GUIDE
Plus+ system?
Can I receive GUIDE Plus+ system
data via a connected digital satellite
receiver or a Set Top Box?
How can I cancel a timer
programming?
 You can manually change the start and end time of programmes in the
Timer Recording menu.
But if timings are altered by more than 10 minutes, “Guide Link” will not be
able to function.
 No, only via the built-in tuner. To perform timer recordings with digital
satellite receivers or Set Top Boxes, please use the External Link feature
or your unit’s manual timer programming.
 Press [PROG/CHECK] and select the desired entry and then press
[DELETE ].
What happens when I unplug my
unit from the household mains
socket?
 The GUIDE Plus+ system data will not be updated. If the unit is
disconnected from the AC mains for a longer period of time, then the GUIDE
Plus+ data is lost.
Perform “DVB Auto Setup” in the Setup menu.
Recording
Can I record from a commercially
purchased video cassette or DVD?
Can DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL,
and +RW recorded on the unit be
played on other equipment?
Can a digital audio signal from
the unit be recorded to other
equipment?
 Most commercially sold video cassettes and DVDs are copy protected;
therefore, recording is usually not possible.
 You can play these discs on compatible equipment such as DVD players
after finalising the disc on this unit.
[+RW] It is not necessary to finalise +RW. To enable play on other DVD
players, please use “Create Top Menu” in the DVD Management menu.
 In any case, ability to play a disc depends on the condition of the
recording, the quality of the disc, and the capability and format constraints
of the DVD player.
 If you play a DVD-R DL, +R DL or +RW, use compatible equipment.
 You can record if using the PCM signal. When recording DVD, change the
“Digital Audio Output” settings to the following via the Setup menu:
– PCM Down Conversion: “On”
– Dolby Digital: “PCM”
– DTS: “PCM”
– MPEG: “PCM”
However, only
– As long as digital recording from the disc is permitted.
– As long as the recording equipment is compatible with 48 kHz sampling
frequency.
 You cannot record MP3 or WMA signals.
USB
What can or cannot be done using
the USB port on this unit?
 You can play DivX, MP3, WMA or still picture (JPEG) files on a USB
memory.
 You can copy still pictures (JPEG) files on a USB memory to the HDD,
DVD-RAM or SD card ([EX89]).
 You can copy MP3 or WMA files on a USB memory to the HDD.
 You can connect a video equipment and copy SD Video to the HDD or
DVD-RAM.
 Data on the HDD or a disc cannot be transferred to a USB memory.
 Data on a USB memory cannot be edited or a USB memory cannot be
formatted on this unit.
 Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit.
 This unit cannot be connected to a computer and it cannot record to an
external device. i.e. an external hard drive via the USB port.
Music
What will happen if I try to record
the same CD multiple times?
Can I transfer the music tracks
from HDD to the disc or USB
memory?
 New album will be made following the existing album.
 No, you cannot.
Page
22
28, 30
31
−
71
Page
−
69
−
−
73
−
Page
38
63
64
61
−
−
17
−
Page
−
Reference
GUIDE Plus+
−
83
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 83
2009/04/27 11:45:49
Messages
On the Unit’s Display
H
,F
(“ ” stands for a service number.)
DVD
(“ ” stands for a number.)
GUIDE
HARD ERR
NoERAS
NoREAD
NoWRIT
FINAL
PLEASE WAIT
PROG FULL
REMOVE
SW-DL
SP 35:50, LP 151h
“SP”, “LP” and the numbers are
examples.
UNSUPPORT
UNFORMAT
EXT-L
F74
F75
U59
U61
U76
U80, U81, U99

 An error has occurred. The number following “H” or “F” depends on the
status of the unit. Check the items below and in the Troubleshooting
Guide. If the service number still does not disappear after the check, reset
the unit ( 86, “To restore the unit if it freezes”).
 If the service numbers fail to clear, note the service numbers and contact a
qualified service person.
 The remote control and the main unit are using different codes. Change
the code on the remote control.
 GUIDE Plus+ data is being downloaded.
 If there is no change after turning the unit on and off, consult the dealer
where the unit was purchased.
 You cannot delete items on this disc.
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.
 The disc is dirty or badly scratched. The unit cannot record, play, or edit.
 The disc may be incompatible or of poor quality.
 You have used a lens cleaner and it has finished operation. Press
[ OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to eject the disc.
 You cannot write to this disc.
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.
 When the screen asking if you want to finalise the disc appears, the
message is displayed.
 Displayed when the unit is started. This is not a malfunction.
 The unit is carrying out its recovery process. You cannot operate the unit
while the message is displayed.
 There are already 32 timer recording programmes. Delete unnecessary
timer recording programmes.
 The USB device is drawing too much power. Remove the USB device.
 The unit is performing a software update.
 Available space on the HDD or disc. The example “SP 35:50” is displayed
when less than 100 hours are available and the example “LP 151h” is
displayed when over 100 hours are available.
“SP” and “LP” are recording modes, “35:50” means “35 hours 50 minutes”
and “151h” means “151 hours”.
 You have inserted a disc the unit cannot play or record onto.
You tried to operate with a non-compatible USB memory.
 You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +RW, an unused +R,
+R DL or DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) that has been recorded on other
equipment.
Format the disc to use it.
However all the recorded contents on the disc are deleted.
 This unit is in EXT LINK standby. EXT LINK has been turned on and will
stop operation on the unit until the recording has completed.
Press [EXT LINK] to stop recording or cancel linked timer.
 The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to a transfer
malfunction. Consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
 The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to an internal data
malfunction. Consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
 The unit is hot.
The unit switches to standby for safety reasons. Wait for about 30 minutes
until the message disappears.
Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not
block the cooling fan on the rear of the unit.
 (When a disc is not inserted) Displays when a malfunction has occurred.
This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to
normal operation; it is not broken. Once the display disappears you can
use the unit again.
 HDMI cannot be output because this unit is connected to a model that
does not support copyright protection.
 The unit fails to operate properly. Press [/I] on the main unit to switch the
unit to standby mode. Press [/I] on the main unit again to turn the unit
on.
Page
−
−
86
76
−
−
81
15, 16
7
−
26
−
−
31
−
76
−
15, 16
17
26
28
−
−
−
−
−
−
The message are alternately displayed.
84
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 84
2009/04/27 11:45:49
On the Unit’s Display
(Continued)
X HOLD
Page
 There was something unusual detected with the disc while recording,
playing or copying; there was a power failure or the AC mains lead was
disconnected while the unit was on. The unit is carrying out its recovery
process. This process restores the unit to normal operation. The unit is not
broken. Wait until the message disappears.
 The Child Lock function is activated.
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN ] at the same time until “X HOLD”
disappears.
On the TV
Authorisation Error.
Cannot finish recording completely.
Copy-protect signal was detected.
Disc is full, or maximum number of
titles are recorded.
Cannot finish recording completely.
Cannot record.
Maximum number of titles
exceeded.
Cannot playback.
TV system is different from the
setting.
To playback, please change the TV
System in Setup.
Cannot play on this unit.
No Disc
No folders.
[EX89]
No SD CARD
This card is incompatible.
Not enough space in the copy
destination.
This is a non-recordable disc.
Unable to format.
This disc is not formatted properly.
Format it using DVD Management
in FUNCTION MENU.
Not enough space on HDD.
Space of 4 hours (in SP mode) is
necessary.
Maximum number of titles is
recorded on HDD. Please delete
unwanted titles.
Rental Expired.
 You are trying to play the DivX VOD content that was purchased with a
different registration code. You cannot play the content on this unit. (DivX)
 The programme was copy-protected.
−
77
Page
39
−
 The HDD or disc may be full.
 The maximum number of title has been exceeded.
 [HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] Create space by erasing unwanted titles. Even
if you erase recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL
there is no increase in disc space. Available recording space on a DVDRW (DVD-Video format) or +RW disc increases when the last title is
deleted (space may increase slightly when you delete other titles).
 Use a new disc.
 You tried to play a title recorded using a different encoding system from
that of the TV system currently selected on the unit.
Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit.
−
25
23, 48,
68
 You tried to play a non-compatible image.
 Turn the unit off and re-insert the card ([EX89]).
 The disc is upside down. If it is a single-sided disc, insert it so the label is
facing up.
 There is no compatible folder in this unit.
 The card is not inserted. If this message is displayed with a compatible
card already inserted, turn off the unit, remove and then re-insert the card.
 The format of the card inserted is incomplete.
 Create space by deleting any unnecessary items.
18
81
−
 Delete one or more items registered on the copy list to ensure that the
“Destination Capacity” is not exceeded.
 The disc may be dirty or scratched.
 The unit cannot record on the disc you inserted. Insert a DVD-RAM or
unfinalised DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, or +RW disc.
 You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL or +RW
disc.
Format the disc with the unit.
 You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
 [-R]DL] [+R]DL] It is not possible to copy when there is not enough free
space on the HDD or when the total number of the recorded titles on the
HDD and the titles to be copied are greater than 499.
Delete unwanted titles from the HDD.
 The DivX VOD content has zero remaining plays. You cannot play it.
(DivX)
 The operation is prohibited by the unit or disc.
−
75
18
17, 18
17
23, 48,
55, 68
59, 62,
65
81
15
68
−
23, 48,
68
Reference
U88
39
−
85
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 85
2009/04/27 11:45:49
Troubleshooting Guide
When Other Panasonic Products Respond
to this Remote Control
Use this function to synchronize the codes for the
remote control and the main unit when there are other
Panasonic products close to your unit.
With the unit stopped
 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
 Press [, ] to select “Others”, then press [OK].
 Press [, ] to select “Setup”, then press [OK].
 Press [, ] to select “Others”, then press [].
 Press [, ] to select “Remote Control”, then
press [OK].
 Press [, ] to select the code (“DVD 1”, “DVD 2”
or “DVD 3”) and press [OK].
Remote Control
Setup
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Press “” and “OK” together
for more than 5 seconds on the remote
control.
To reset the unit’s settings
All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password,
Owner ID, Clock and remote control code return to the factory
preset. The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.
On the main unit
Press and hold [ CH] and [CH ] for about 5 seconds.
– Refer to Tips of “DVB Auto Setup” ( 71) for detail
information.
To reset the ratings level settings
With the unit stopped
 Press [ OPEN/CLOSE] to open the disc tray.
 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
On the main unit
 Press and hold [ REC] and [/x1.3] for about
5 seconds.
Display
Connection
Others
To Reset This Unit
OK
RETURN
To restore the unit if it freezes
 While pressing and holding [OK],
press and hold the numbered button [1], [2] or [3]
corresponding to the code set in step  for more
than 5 seconds to set.
 Press [OK] to complete.
On the main unit
Press and hold [/I] for more than 10 seconds.
– The unit is turned off.
When the following indicator appears on the unit’s display
– Change the code on the remote control to match the code
displayed for the main unit ( step ).
Tips
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Language code list
Enter the code with the numbered buttons.
Abkhazian:
Afar:
Afrikaans:
Albanian:
Amharic:
Arabic:
Armenian:
Assamese:
Aymara:
Azerbaijani:
Bashkir:
Basque:
Bengali, Bangla:
Bhutani:
Bihari:
Breton:
Bulgarian:
Burmese:
Byelorussian:
Cambodian:
Catalan:
6566
6565
6570
8381
6577
6582
7289
6583
6589
6590
6665
6985
6678
6890
6672
6682
6671
7789
6669
7577
6765
Chinese:
Corsican:
Croatian:
Czech:
Danish:
Dutch:
English:
Esperanto:
Estonian:
Faroese:
Fiji:
Finnish:
French:
Frisian:
Galician:
Georgian:
German:
Greek:
Greenlandic:
Guarani:
Gujarati:
9072
6779
7282
6783
6865
7876
6978
6979
6984
7079
7074
7073
7082
7089
7176
7565
6869
6976
7576
7178
7185
Hausa:
Hebrew:
Hindi:
Hungarian:
Icelandic:
Indonesian:
Interlingua:
Irish:
Italian:
Japanese:
Javanese:
Kannada:
Kashmiri:
Kazakh:
Kirghiz:
Korean:
Kurdish:
Laotian:
Latin:
Latvian, Lettish:
Lingala:
7265
7387
7273
7285
7383
7378
7365
7165
7384
7465
7487
7578
7583
7575
7589
7579
7585
7679
7665
7686
7678
Lithuanian:
Macedonian:
Malagasy:
Malay:
Malayalam:
Maltese:
Maori:
Marathi:
Moldavian:
Mongolian:
Nauru:
Nepali:
Norwegian:
Oriya:
Pashto, Pushto:
Persian:
Polish:
Portuguese:
Punjabi:
Quechua:
Rhaeto-Romance:
7684
7775
7771
7783
7776
7784
7773
7782
7779
7778
7865
7869
7879
7982
8083
7065
8076
8084
8065
8185
8277
Romanian:
Russian:
Samoan:
Sanskrit:
Scots Gaelic:
Serbian:
Serbo-Croatian:
Shona:
Sindhi:
Singhalese:
Slovak:
Slovenian:
Somali:
Spanish:
Sundanese:
Swahili:
Swedish:
Tagalog:
Tajik:
Tamil:
Tatar:
8279
8285
8377
8365
7168
8382
8372
8378
8368
8373
8375
8376
8379
6983
8385
8387
8386
8476
8471
8465
8484
Telugu:
Thai:
Tibetan:
Tigrinya:
Tonga:
Turkish:
Turkmen:
Twi:
Ukrainian:
Urdu:
Uzbek:
Vietnamese:
Volapük:
Welsh:
Wolof:
Xhosa:
Yiddish:
Yoruba:
Zulu:
8469
8472
6679
8473
8479
8482
8475
8487
8575
8582
8590
8673
8679
6789
8779
8872
7473
8979
9085
86
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 86
2009/04/27 11:45:50
Before requesting service, make the following checks. If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the solutions
indicated in the chart do not solve the problem, consult your dealer for instructions.
The following does not indicate a problem with the unit:
 Regular disc rotating sound.
 Poor reception due to atmospheric conditions.
 Image disturbance during search.
 Periodic interruptions to the reception due to digital satellite broadcasting breaks.
 Operations are slow to respond when “Power Save” is set to “On”.
 Operations are not working due to a poor-quality disc. (Try again using a Panasonic disc.)
 The unit freezing due to the activation of one of its safety devices ( 86, To restore the unit if it freezes).
 When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound.
General Issues
Power
Page
 Insert the AC mains lead securely into a known active household mains
socket.
10
 Linked timer recordings with external equipment is in recording standby
(“EXT-L” on the unit’s display blinks when [] is pressed). Press [EXT
LINK] to cancel the recording standby.
28
The unit switches to standby mode.
 One of the unit’s safety devices is activated. Press [/I] on the main unit
to turn the unit on.
−
The unit is turned off automatically.
 If you connected this unit to an “HDAVI Control” compatible TV with an
HDMI cable, or connected this unit to a Q Link-compatible TV with a fully
wired 21-pin Scart cable, this unit will be automatically set to standby
mode when the TV is set to standby mode.
44
This unit turns off when the TV
input is switched.
 If connected with an HDAVI Control 4 compatible TV (VIERA) with the
“Intelligent Auto Standby” setting activated on the TV, when switching
the TV input, the unit will be automatically turned to standby. For details
please read the operating instructions of the TV.
−
No power.
The unit does not turn on pressing
[].
General Issues
Displays
Page
 Change “FL Display” in the Setup menu.
74
“0:00” is flashing on the unit’s
display.
 Set the clock.
14
The time recorded on the disc and
the available time shown do not
add up.
 Times shown may disagree with actual times.
−
 [-R] [-R\DL] [+R] [+R]DL] The remaining capacity does not increase even if
titles are deleted.
−
The displayed time of this unit is
different from the actual recording
time or MP3/WMA recording time.
 Available space on a DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW disc increases
when you delete the last title (space may increase slightly when you delete
other titles).
−
 If you record or edit about 200 times or more, the remaining capacity of
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R, and +R DL is reduced and then recording or
editing may be disabled (for the second layer on DVD-R DL and +R DL,
this happens after about 60 times).
−
 The time during searching may not be displayed accurately.
−
The clock is not correct.
 Under adverse reception conditions, etc., the automatic time correction
function may not work.
In this case, “Automatic” is automatically turned to “Off”. If re-setting the
Auto Clock Setting does not work, set the time manually.
14
Compared to the actual recorded
time, the elapsed time displayed is
less.
(Only when recording in NTSC)
 The displayed recording/play time is converted from the number of frames
at 29.97 frames (equal to 0.999 seconds) to one second. There will be a
slight difference between the time displayed and the actual elapsed time
(e.g., actual one-hour elapsed time may display as approximately
59 minutes 56 seconds). This does not affect the recording.
−
The clock does not display on the
unit when switched to standby.
 Ensure “Power Save” is set to “Off”.
76
Reference
The display is dim.
87
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 87
2009/04/27 11:45:50
Troubleshooting Guide
General Issues
Operation
Cannot operate the TV with unit’s
remote control.
The remote control doesn’t work.
The unit is on but cannot be
operated.
“U88” is displayed and the disc
cannot be ejected.
Cannot eject a disc.
Startup is slow.
General Issues
 Change the manufacturer code on the remote control.
 It may be necessary to set the code on the remote control again after
changing the batteries.
 The remote control code is wrong. Change to the correct code.
 The batteries are depleted. Replace them with new ones.
 Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the main unit.
 Remove obstacles between the remote control and the main unit.
 Remove dust from the transmission window and the unit’s sensor.
 Coloured glass may obstruct the signal reception/transmission.
 Don’t place the signal sensor in direct sunlight or in areas that may be
subject to sun exposure.
 It may be necessary to set the manufacturer code again after changing the
batteries.
 If the “X HOLD” is displayed on the unit’s front display, the Child Lock
function is activated.
 If the “EXT-L” is displayed on the unit’s front display, Linked timer
recordings with external equipment is in recording standby.
 Recording drive or playback drive has not been selected properly.
 Some operations may be prohibited by the disc.
 The unit is warm (“U59” appears on the unit’s display). Wait until “U59”
disappears.
 One of the unit’s safety devices may have been activated.
Reset the unit as follows:
Press [/I] on the main unit to switch to standby mode.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby mode, reset the unit ( 86, “To restore
the unit if it freezes”).
 The unit cannot be operated while performing an update. “SW-DL”
appears on the unit’s display while it is updating. Please wait until the “SWDL” disappears.
 The unit is carrying out the recovery process. The disc may be defective.
Do the following to eject the disc. Try another disc.
(1) Press [/I] on the main unit to switch to standby mode.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby mode, reset the unit ( 86, “To
restore the unit if it freezes”).
(2) While the unit is turned off, press and hold [] and [CH ] on the main
unit at the same time for about 5 seconds. (Ejection may take extra
time depending on discs.)
 The unit is recording.
 The unit may have a problem. Eject the disc as in (2) above.
 Linked timer recordings with external equipment is in recording standby
(“EXT-L” on the unit’s display blinks when [] is pressed.) Press [EXT
LINK] to cancel the recording standby.
If the Child Lock function is activated, above operation does not work.
Cancel the Child Lock function.
 Startup takes time in the following situations:
– A disc other than a DVD-RAM is inserted.
– The clock is not set.
– Immediately after a power failure or the AC mains lead is connected.
– When the unit is connected with an HDMI cable.
 Set “Power Save” to “Off” in the Setup menu.
If connected with an HDAVI Control 4 compatible TV (VIERA) with the
“Standby Power Save” setting activated on the TV, even with “Power
Save” set to “Off”, when the TV is in Standby mode, the unit may take
some time to startup.
GUIDE Plus+
The GUIDE Plus+ system does not
receive any data.
“No Data” is displayed for some or
all stations.
 Check whether the clock is properly set.
 If signal quality is bad (ghost images or limited reception), the GUIDE
Plus+ system may not be able to receive any data.
 Perform “DVB Auto Setup” in the Setup menu.
 Some stations are not supported by the GUIDE Plus+ system.
 Programme the timer recording manually.
 Perform “DVB Auto Setup” in the Setup menu.
Page
77
86
86
7
7
−
−
−
−
77
77
28
20, 21
−
84
−
76
−
−
−
28
77
−
76
Page
14
−
71
−
30
71
88
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 88
2009/04/27 11:45:50
GUIDE Plus+ (Continued)
The GUIDE Plus+ information is
not displayed properly.
The GUIDE Plus+ data is not
updated.
General Issues
 There was a programme change or GUIDE Plus+ information from a
broadcast station was possibly not correctly transmitted.
Check the current programme, e.g. on the Web site for the GUIDE Plus+
system provider or station provider.
 The unit must be in standby mode in order to update the data. If the unit is
in EXT LINK mode (“EXT-L” lights up in the unit’s display), then the data
update may also not work.
 Make sure that the time is set correctly.
 Check whether “Off” is set under “TV Guide Download in Standby” and
change the setting in “System Update” in the Setup menu.
DVB-T
Digital broadcasts cannot be
received.
TV reception worsens after
connecting the unit.
After DVB Auto Setup only some or
no DVB channels are found.
Picture regularly breaks up on
some channels, “No Signal”
message is displayed.
Picture very infrequently breaks up
on some or all channels.
Unusual station sorting.
The digital channel information
does not appear.
No Digital Teletext
Some functions of digital text do
not work.
After the Auto-Setup, there aren’t
any stations in the station list
although found stations were
displayed during Auto-Setup.
The Signal Strength is over 100%
(> 10)
After performing an update, you
can no longer receive broadcasts.
Page
−
−
14
76
Page
 Check the connections.
 Digital broadcast may not have started in your region yet.
 The aerial may not be pointing in the direction of the TV station, or the
direction of the aerial may have changed due to strong winds or vibration.
If problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer.
 Perform “DVB Auto Setup” in the Setup menu.
 This can occur because the signals are being divided between the unit and
other equipment. It can be solved by using a signal booster, available from
electronics retailers.
 Check to ensure your area is covered by DVB transmissions.
 Check that the aerial and antenna cable are designed for DVB.
If you live within 5–10 km of DVB transmission towers, a combined VHF/
UHF aerial should be adequate. Outside this area, separate VHF and UHF
aerials provide superior reception performance.
 Perform “DVB Auto Setup” in the Setup menu.
 Check “Signal Condition”. If “Signal Quality” or “Signal Strength” are
displayed in red or constantly changing, check aerial. If problem persists
consult your local TV aerial installer.
 Check that the aerial and antenna cable are designed for DVB.
 Interference (known as impulse noise) from household appliances such
as light switches, fridges, etc. may cause picture break up and/or audio
distortion. Use a high quality quad shielded coaxial cable fly lead between
this unit and antenna wall socket to minimise impulse noise pickup. If
problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer.
 Check aerial connection.
 Adjust the aerial reception with “DVB Manual Tuning”.
 Perform “DVB Auto Setup” in the Setup menu.
 Electrical atmospheric interference caused by local or distant lightning
storms or heavy rain with wind in “leafy” locations may cause pictures to
break up and audio to mute or distort momentarily.
 Impulse noise interference from an infrequently used electrical appliance,
or a passing vehicle or lawn mower with a “noisy” ignition system.
 Perform “DVB Auto Setup” in the Setup menu.
 The station sorting of this unit is pre-defined. Use Favourites to sort the
stations as you want them.
 Select the length of time (3–10 sec.) in the “On-Screen Messages” in the
Setup menu.
 The digital channel information will not appear during playback or recording.
 Perform “DVB Auto Setup” in the Setup menu.
 When subtitle is on or additional information in the digital channel
informaion is displayed, Digital Teletext does not work.
 New functions introduced by broadcasters cannot be guaranteed to work.
 Perform “DVB Auto Setup” in the Setup menu.
 “Shipping Condition” was performed or the unit was in the delivery status.
The Auto-Setup was then started and interrupted.
Do an Auto-Setup again and let it continue right through to the end.
The data is only saved after this has been completed.
 Reduce the signal amplification at your aerial.
 Depending on the content of the update, some settings may have returned
to the preset values. Fix the settings again.
10, 11,
78
−
−
71
−
−
−
71
71
−
−
−
71
71
−
−
71
70
74
−
71
−
−
71
−
Reference
General Issues
71
−
89
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 89
2009/04/27 11:45:50
Troubleshooting Guide
General Issues
VIERA Link
VIERA Link doesn’t work.
The Control Panel does not
appear.
The operation on this unit (music
playback etc.) is interrupted.
General Issues
USB
The contents of the USB memory
cannot be read.
Playback Issues
 Check the HDMI cable connection. Check that “HDMI” is displayed on the
front display when the power for the main unit is set to On.
 Make sure that “VIERA Link” is set to “On”.
 Check the “HDAVI Control” settings on the connected device.
 Some functions may not work depending on the version of “HDAVI Control”
of the connected equipment. This unit supports “HDAVI Control 4” function.
 If the connection for the equipment connected with an HDMI cable was
changed, or if there was a power failure or the plug was removed from
the household mains socket, “HDAVI Control” may not work. In this case,
perform the following operations.
1. When the HDMI cable is connected to all equipment with the power on,
turn the TV (VIERA) on again.
2. Change the TV (VIERA) settings for the “HDAVI Control” function to
off, and then set to on again. (For more information, see the VIERA
operating instructions.)
3. Switch the VIERA input to HDMI connection with this unit, and after this
unit’s screen is displayed, check that “HDAVI Control” is working.
 The control panel is only displayed when connected to a TV with “HDAVI
Control 2” or later function.
 The operation on this unit may be interrupted when you press buttons on
the TV remote control that do not work for VIERA Link functions.
 Remove the USB memory from the USB port and then insert again. If this
does not solve the problem, turn off and turn on the unit again.
 Check that the USB memory is inserted correctly.
 The format of the USB memory or of its contents is not compatible with the
unit. (The contents on the USB memory may be damaged.)
 The USB memory contains a folder structure and/or file extensions that are
not compatible with this unit.
 Turn off and then turn on the unit again.
 USB memories connected using a USB extension cable or a USB hub may
not be recognized by this unit.
 Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit.
 If inserted during playback, recording or copying etc., the USB memory may
not be recognized by this unit.
The images from this unit do not
appear on the TV.
 Make sure the connections are pushed in firmly.
Picture is distorted.
 Try connecting an alternative cable.
 Make sure recorder is connected to an appropriate AV input of the TV.
Picture does not appear during
timer recording.
−
75
−
−
−
45
−
Page
Picture
TV reception worsens after
connecting the unit.
Page
 Make sure the TV’s input setting (e.g., AV 1) is correct.
 The TV isn’t compatible with progressive signals.
Press and hold [] and [/1.3] on the main unit for about 5 seconds. The
setting will change to interlace.
 The TV isn’t compatible with RGB signals.
Set “AV1 Output” in the Setup menu to “Video (with component)”.
 The unit’s “TV System” setting differs from the TV system used by the disc
now playing. While stopped, keep pressing [] and [ OPEN/CLOSE] on
the main unit for 5 or more seconds.
The system switches from PAL to NTSC or vice versa.
 When this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, use a disc that matches
with this unit’s TV system.
 Picture may not be seen when more than 4 devices are connected with
HDMI cables.
Reduce the number of connected devices.
 This can occur because the signals are being divided between the unit and
other equipment. It can be solved by using a signal booster, available from
electronics retailers.
 Timer recordings work regardless of whether the unit is on or off. To confirm
the timer recording is going to work properly, turn the unit on.
−
81
17, 18
18
−
−
17
−
Page
10−12,
78−80
−
10−12,
78, 79
−
−
75
75
−
−
−
−
90
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 90
2009/04/27 11:45:50
Picture (Continued)
The screen changes automatically.
The 4:3 aspect ratio picture
expands left and right.
Screen size is wrong.
Titles recorded with 16:9 aspect
are stretched vertically.
There is a lot of after-image when
playing video.
When playing DVD-Video using
progressive output, one part of the
picture momentarily appears to be
doubled up.
There is no apparent change
in picture quality when making
adjustments in the Picture menu
using the on-screen display.
Cannot see the beginning of the
title played.
The picture is distorted during play,
or video will not play correctly.
Page
 When “Screen Saver” in the Setup menu is set to “On”, the display may
turn to the screen saver mode automatically if there is no operation for
5 minutes or more. Press [OK] to return to the previous screen.
Set “Screen Saver” in the Setup menu to “Off” to turn off the screen saver
function.
 Use the TV to change the aspect. If your TV does not have that function,
set “Progressive” in the Picture menu to “Off”.
 If you connect an HDMI cable, set “Aspect for 4:3 Video” in the Setup
menu to “16:9”.
 Check the settings for “TV Aspect” in the Setup menu.
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to your
television’s operating instructions.
 16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the following cases.
– [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] If you recorded or copied using “EP” or “FR
(recordings 5 hours or longer)” recording mode.
– If you recorded or copied to a +R, +R DL or +RW.
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to your
television’s operating instructions.
 Set “Playback NR” in the Picture menu to “Off”.
No sound.
Low volume.
Distorted sound.
Cannot hear the desired
audio type.
67
75
74
−
−
67
 Set “Progressive” in the Picture menu to “Off”. This problem is caused
by the editing method or material used on DVD-Video, but should be
corrected if you use interlaced output.
67
 The effect cannot be seen with certain types of video.
−
 (If connecting to a TV that supports VIERA Link with an HDMI cable)
When [] (PLAY) is pressed on this unit’s remote control, but you may not
be able to see the beginning of the title played until the picture is displayed
on the TV. Using [], return to the beginning of the title.
 You may be playing a TV programme recorded with poor reception or
unfavourable weather conditions.
 The picture may be distorted or a black screen may appear briefly
between recorded titles in the following situations:
– between titles recorded with different recording modes.
– between scenes recorded with different aspect ratios.
– between scenes recorded with different resolutions.
– between playlist chapters.
 Make sure the connections are pushed in firmly.
−
 Try connecting an alternative cable.
Playback Issues
74
Sound
−
−
10−12,
78−80
−
Page
 Check the connections and the “Digital Audio Output” settings. Check the
input mode on the amplifier if you have connected one.
 Check if TV is muted.
 Check if amplifier is muted.
 Sound is not output while fast-forwarding during chasing playback and
simultaneous record and playback.
 Audio may not be output due to how files were created. (DivX)
 The sound effects will not work when the bitstream signal is output from
the HDMI AV OUT terminal or the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.
 Audio may not be heard when more than 4 devices are connected with
HDMI cables. Reduce the number of connected devices.
 To output audio from a device connected with an HDMI cable, set “Digital
Audio Output” to “HDMI and Optical” in the Setup menu.
 Depending on the connected equipment, the sound may be distorted if this
unit is connected with an HDMI cable.
 Make sure the connections are pushed in firmly.
 Try connecting an alternative cable.
10−12,
73, 75,
80
−
−
−
−
−
−
75
−
Reference
Playback Issues
10−12,
78−80
−
(Continued on the next page)
91
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 91
2009/04/27 11:45:51
Troubleshooting Guide
Playback Issues
Sound (Continued)
Cannot switch audio.
Playback Issues
 You cannot switch the audio in the following cases.
– When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL
or +RW disc is in the disc tray while DVD drive is selected.
– When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is
set to “LPCM”.
 When recording a digital broadcast with multiple audio channels, this unit
will record only the audio channel selected in “DVB Multi Audio” in the onscreen display. The audio channel cannot be switched during playback.
 You have used a digital connection. Set “Dolby Digital” to “PCM” or
connect using audio cables (analogue connection).
 There are discs whose audio cannot be changed due to how the disc was
created.
Operation
Play fails to start even when
[] (PLAY) is pressed.
Play starts but then stops
immediately.
Audio and video momentarily
pause.
DVD-Video is not played.
Alternative soundtrack and subtitles
cannot be selected.
No subtitles.
Angle cannot be changed.
You have forgotten your ratings
password.
Quick View (Play 1.3) does not
work.
The resume play function does not
work.
 Insert the disc correctly with the label facing up.
 The disc is dirty, scratched or marked.
 You tried to play a blank disc or a disc that is unplayable on the unit.
 You tried to play a +RW that needs to be finalised on the equipment used
for recording.
 You may be able to copy a “One time only recording” title that was
recorded to DVD-RAM using a different Panasonic DVD Recorder to this
unit’s HDD, but play is not possible due to copyright protection.
 When recording to DVD-RAM using EP (8Hours) mode, play may not be
possible on DVD players that are compatible with DVD-RAM. In this case
use EP (6Hours) mode.
 You cannot play discs during DV automatic recording.
 If playing DivX VOD content, refer to the homepage where you purchased
it. (DivX)
 Make sure that the TV is turned on. If the menu or messages are
displayed, follow the on-screen instructions.
 This occurs between playlist chapters.
 This occurs between chapters and with partially deleted titles on finalised
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW
that have been copied using the high speed mode.
 This occurs as scenes change during Quick View (Play 1.3).
 [-R]DL] [+R]DL] When playing a title recorded on both layers, the unit
automatically switches between layers and plays the title in the same way
as a normal programme. However, video and audio may momentarily cut
out when the unit is switching layers.
 Ensure the DVD-Video region number for the disc is correct, and the disc
is not defective.
 You have set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play. Change this setting.
 The languages are not recorded on the disc.
 You may not be able to use the on-screen menus to change the
soundtrack and subtitles on some discs. Use the disc’s menus to make
changes.
 Subtitles are not recorded on the disc.
 Turn the subtitles on and select “Text” or the subtitle number.
 This function depends on software availability. Angles can only be
changed during scenes where different angles are recorded.
 With the tray open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive, then
press and hold [ REC] and [/1.3] on the main unit simultaneously for
about 5 or more seconds.
 This does not work when audio is other than Dolby Digital.
 This does not work while recording in XP or FR mode.
 Memorized positions are cancelled when
– press [] several times.
– open the disc tray.
– [CD] [VCD] [USB] turn off the unit.
– a recording or timer recording was executed.
Page
−
73
67
73, 80
−
Page
81
81
15, 16,
18
−
−
72
−
39
−
−
−
−
15
Cover
72
−
20
−
66
−
−
−
−
−
92
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 92
2009/04/27 11:45:51
Operation (Continued)
The Video CD picture does not
display properly.
Time Slip, Manual Skip, etc. does
not work.
It takes time before play starts.
Picture stops.
Cannot see the beginning of the
title played.
Recording Issues
Page
 When connecting to Multi-system TV, select “NTSC” in “TV System” in the
Setup menu.
 When connecting to PAL TV, the lower part of the picture cannot be
displayed correctly during search.
 These functions do not work with finalised discs.
 Time Slip does not work when the unit’s “TV System” settings are different
from the title recorded on the disc.
This is normal on DivX video. (DivX)
Picture may stop if the DivX files are greater than 2 GB. (DivX)
 (If connecting to a TV that supports VIERA Link with an HDMI cable)
When [] (PLAY) is pressed on this unit’s remote control, you may not be
able to see the beginning of the title played until the picture is displayed on
the TV. Using [], return to the beginning of the title.
Recording/Timer Recording/Copying/External input
Cannot record.
Cannot copy.
Timer recording does not work
properly.
 You haven’t inserted a disc or the disc you inserted cannot be recorded
on. Insert a disc the unit can record onto.
 [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] The disc is unformatted. Format the disc.
 The write-protect tab on the cartridge is set to “PROTECT” or the disc is
protected with the “DVD Management” settings.
 Some programmes have limitations on the number of times they can be
recorded (CPRM).
 The disc is full or nearly full. Delete unneeded titles ([HDD] [RAM]
[-RW‹V›] [+RW]) or use another disc.
 You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
 Video cannot be recorded onto a DVD-R with still images recorded on it.
 [-R]DL][+R]DL]In the following situations, you cannot copy. Delete
unnecessary titles from the HDD and then copy.
– If there is not enough space available on the HDD (If you will copy titles
from the HDD to a blank disc and fill the entire disc, HDD disc space
equivalent to 4 hours of SP mode recording is necessary).
– If the number of recorded titles and the number of titles to be copied has
exceeded 499.
 You cannot record and copy on finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL discs. However, you can record and copy
again if you format DVD-RW.
 If you repeatedly insert discs or turn the unit on and off about 50 times
or more, the recording or editing of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVDVideo format), +R, +R DL, and +RW discs may be disabled.
 DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW
discs recorded on this unit may not be recordable on other Panasonic
DVD Recorders.
 This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have PAL
signal recordings.
(However, both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.)
Play of discs recorded with both PAL and NTSC on another unit is not
guaranteed.
 Some broadcasts are copyright protected.
 The timer programme is incorrect or different timer programme times
overlap. Correct the programme.
 The programme is not in timer recording standby. (“” in the timer
recording list is not on.)
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
2 Press [, ] to select the programme and press the “Red” button.
 The clock is not correct. Set the clock.
The programme information in the GUIDE Plus+ system may not be
correct. It is recommended to modify the start and end times to allow a
margin of a few minutes.
75
−
−
75
−
−
−
Page
15
68
68
24, 96
23, 48,
68
−
−
23, 48,
68
−
−
−
75
15, 24,
96
31
31
Reference
Playback Issues
14
22
(Continued on the next page)
93
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 93
2009/04/27 11:45:51
Troubleshooting Guide
Recording Issues
Recording/Timer Recording/Copying/External input (Continued)
Timer recording does not stop even
when [] is pressed.
The timer programme remains
even after recording finishes.
Part or all of a recorded title has
been lost.
Stripe-shaped black noise is
recorded.
The programme name and the
recorded title do not match.
Cannot copy to a DVD-R, etc, disc
using the high speed mode.
When copying, it takes a long time
even in high speed mode.
An unusually loud sound is coming
from the rotating DVD-R, etc.
Cannot record video or sound from
the external device.
The DV auto recording function
does not work.
 When using the linked timer recording with external equipment, press
[EXT LINK]. (“EXT-L” on the unit’s display disappears.)
 If you start recording immediately after turning on the unit while “Power
Save” is set to “Off” in the Setup menu (Quick Start mode), you cannot
then stop recording for a few seconds.
 The timer programme remains if set to daily, weekly or series timer
recording.
 If the power shuts down or the AC mains lead is disconnected from the
household mains socket while recording or editing, the title may be lost
or the HDD/disc may become unusable. We cannot offer any guarantee
regarding lost titles or discs. You will have to format the disc ([HDD] [RAM]
[-RW‹V›] [+RW]) or use a new disc.
 An external playback device is interfering with the TV because the device
is too close to the TV. Move the device away from the TV.
 There was a programme change after timer recording was set but the
recorded title still has the old programme name.
 When recording to the HDD, set “Recording Format” to “Video format” in
the Setup menu. (The default setting is “Video format”).
Page
28
−
30, 31,
34
68
−
−
72
 In the following cases, high speed mode does not work, even if the titles
were recorded with “Recording Format” set to “Video format”.
− [+R] [+R\DL] [+RW] If recorded in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or
longer)” mode
− [+R] [+R\DL] [+RW] If recorded in 16:9 aspect
− [-R] [-R\DL] [-RW‹V›] If recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode or “FR”
(recordings 5 hours or longer) mode
56
 [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded on other Panasonic DVD Recorders with
“Recording Format” (“Rec for High Speed Copy”) set to “Video format”
(“On”), and then copied to the HDD on this unit may not copy to +R, +R DL
or +RW discs with high-speed copy.
 Use a disc that is compatible with high speed recording. Even if the disc
is high speed recording compatible, the maximum speed may not be
possible due to the condition of the disc.
−
 It takes longer than normal to copy many titles.
−
 You cannot high speed copy to DVD-R titles longer than 6 hours when
using other Panasonic DVD Recorders that are not compatible with EP
(8 Hours) mode recording.
 When recording or high speed copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW the sound of the disc rotating
may be louder than normal, however, this is not a problem.
 The external device is not correctly connected.
−
 The proper external input channel (AV2, AV3, or DV) is not selected. Press
[INPUT SELECT] to change.
 If images cannot be recorded or if the recording is aborted, check the
connections and the DV equipment settings.
 You cannot start recording until the images from the DV equipment appear
on the television.
 Recording may not be performed as desired if the time codes on the tape
in the DV equipment are not successive.
 Depending on the equipment, the DV automatic recording may not operate
properly.
 You can only record audio/video images on a DV tape.
−
−
−
−
−
11, 12,
29, 78,
80
−
29
−
−
−
−
94
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 94
2009/04/27 11:45:51
Music
Tracks could not be copied to the
HDD.
ID3 tag of a MP3 file or WMA tag
of a WMA file is not completely
displayed.
Editing Issues
 If there are copyright protected tracks such as SCMS restrictions, they will
not be copied.
 Recording from CDs that do not conform to CD-DA specifications (copy
control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.
 Bonus tracks may not be copied.
 Only the track name ([HDD] [USB]) and artist name ([HDD]) can be displayed
with this unit.
HDD & DVD
Cannot edit.
 You may not be able to edit on the HDD if there is no available space.
Delete any unwanted titles to create empty space.
 The disc is dirty. Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
 Disc may be defective or of poor quality.
 You tried formatting a disc that is not compatible with the unit.
Cannot format.
Cannot create chapters.
Cannot mark the start point or the
end point during “Partial Delete”
operation.
Cannot delete chapters.
The available recording time
doesn’t increase even after
deleting titles on the disc.
Cannot create a playlist.
Editing Issues
Page
 The unit writes the chapter division information to the disc when you turn it
off or remove the disc.
The information is not written if there is an interruption in the power.
 These operations are not possible with still pictures.
 You cannot set points if they are too close to each other. You cannot set an
end point before a start point.
 [HDD] [RAM] When the chapter is too short to delete, use “Combine
Chapters” to make the chapter longer.
 Available space on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R, or +R DL does not increase
even after deleting previous titles.
 Available space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW increases when
you delete the last title.
 You cannot select all the chapters at once in a title if the title also includes
still pictures. Select them individually.
Still Pictures
Cannot display DIRECT
NAVIGATOR screen.
Cannot edit or format a card.
([EX89])
The contents of the card cannot be
read.
([EX89])
Copying, deleting, and setting
protection takes a long time.
Still pictures (JPEG) do not
playback normally.
Can not copy JPEG files to disc.
 This screen cannot be displayed during recording or copy or while the unit
is standing by for linked timer recording with external equipment.
 Release the card’s protection setting. (With some cards, the “Write
Protection Off” message sometimes appears on the screen even when
protection has been set.)
 Remove the card from the slot and then insert again. If this does not solve
the problem, turn off and turn on the unit again.
 The card format is not compatible with the unit. (The contents on the card
may be damaged.)
This unit is compatible with SD Memory Cards that meet SD Card
Specifications FAT12 and FAT16 formats, as well as SDHC Memory Cards
in FAT32 format.
 The card contains a folder structure and/or file extensions that are not
compatible with this unit.
 You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB and
SDHC Memory Cards with capacities from 4 GB to 32 GB.
 This unit cannot play AVCHD format motion pictures or MPEG4 on an SD
card.
 When there are a lot of folders and files, it may sometimes take a few
hours.
 When repeating copying or deleting, it may sometimes take a long time.
Format the disc or card ([EX89]).
 The images that were edited on the PC, such as Progressive JPEG etc.,
may not playback.
 You can copy JPEG files from HDD only to DVD-RAM or DVD-R.
−
−
−
−
Page
23, 48
68
81
−
15, 16,
68
−
−
−
50
−
−
−
Page
−
68
−
17
17, 18
−
−
−
68
18
Reference
Recording Issues
62
95
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 95
2009/04/27 11:45:51
Glossary
Bitstream
Folder
This is a signal compressed and converted into digital form. It is
converted back to a multi-channel audio signal, e.g., 5.1-channel, by
a decoder.
This is a place on the hard disk, disc or SD card ([EX89]) where groups
of data are stored together. In the case of this unit, it refers to the
place where still pictures (JPEG) and MPEG2 are stored.
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media)
Formatting
CPRM is technology used to protect broadcasts that are allowed to
be recorded only once. Such broadcasts can be recorded only with
CPRM-compatible recorders and discs.
Decoder
A decoder restores the coded audio signals on DVDs to normal. This
is called decoding.
Deep Colour
This unit incorporates HDMITM (V.1.3a with Deep Colour) technology
that can reproduce greater colour gradation (4096 steps) when
connected to a compatible TV.
You can enjoy exceptionally rich, natural-looking colours, with
smooth, detailed gradation and minimal colour banding.
[A lower colour gradation (256 steps), without Deep Colour, will be
reproduced if connected to a TV which does not support Deep Colour.
The unit will automatically set appropriate output to suit the connected TV.]
DivX
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM
recordable on recording equipment.
You can format DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (only as DVD-Video format),
SD card ([EX89]), +RW, and the HDD or unused +R and +R DL on this
unit.
Formatting irrevocably erases all contents.
Frame and Field
Frame refers to the single images that constitute the video you see on
your TV. Each frame consists of 2 fields.
Frame
Field
Field
DivX is a popular media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX media
files contain highly compressed video with high visual quality that
maintains a relatively small file size.
 A frame still shows 2 fields, so there may be some blurring between
them, but picture quality is generally better.
 A field still shows less picture information so it may be rougher, but
there is no blurring.
Dolby Digital
HDD (Hard disk drive)
This is a method of coding digital signals developed by Dolby
Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2 channel) audio, these signals can
also be multi-channel audio. A large amount of audio information can
be recorded on one disc using this method.
When recording on this unit Dolby Digital (2 channel) is the default
audio.
This is a mass data storage device used in computers, etc. A disk
with a surface that has been treated with magnetic fluid is spun and
a magnetic head is brought in close proximity to facilitate the reading
and writing of large amounts of data at high speed.
Down-mixing
This is the process of remixing the multi-channel audio found on
some discs into two channels. It is useful when you want to listen to
the 5.1-channel audio recorded on DVDs through your TV’s speakers.
Some discs prohibit down-mixing. If this is the case, this unit can only
output the front two channels.
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
Unlike conventional connections, it transmits uncompressed digital
video and audio signals on a single cable. This unit supports highdefinition video output [720p (750p), 1080i (1125i) and 1080p (1125p)]
from HDMI AV OUT terminal. To enjoy high-definition video a high
definition compatible television is required.
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
In the instance of this unit, this refers to the hard disk (HDD), disc
(DVD) and SD card (SD) ([EX89]). These perform the reading and
writing of data.
This is a system used for compressing/decoding color still pictures. If
you select JPEG as the storage system on digital cameras, etc., the
data will be compressed to 1/10−1/100 of its original size. The benefit
of JPEG is less deterioration in picture quality considering the degree
of compression.
DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
LPCM (Linear PCM)
This surround system is used in many movie theaters. There is good
separation between the channels, so realistic sound effects are possible.
These are uncompressed digital signals, similar to those found on
CDs.
Dynamic range
MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group)
Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound
that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest
level of sound before distortion occurs. Dynamic range compression
means reducing the gap between the loudest and softest sounds.
This means you can hear dialogue clearly at low volume.
A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour video.
MPEG2 is a compression standard used for DVD and satellite based
digital broadcasting. This unit records programmes using MPEG2.
SD Video files shot with a Panasonic SD video camera, etc. can be
copied to the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc.
Film and Video
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)
DVD-Video are recorded using either film or video. The unit can
determine which type has been used, then uses the most suitable
method of progressive output.
Film:
Recorded at 25 frames per second (PAL discs) or 24
frames per second (NTSC discs). (NTSC discs recorded at
30 frames per second as well.)
Generally appropriate for motion picture films.
Video:
Recorded at 25 frames/50 fields per second (PAL discs) or
30 frames/60 fields per second (NTSC discs). Generally
appropriate for TV drama programmes or animation.
An audio compression method that compresses audio to
approximately 1/10 of its size without any significant loss of audio
quality.
Drive
Finalise
A process that makes play of a recorded CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, etc.
possible on equipment that can play such media. You can finalise
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, and +R DL on
the unit. After finalising, the disc becomes play-only and you can no
longer record or edit. However, finalised DVD-RW can be formatted to
become recordable.
96
Pan & Scan/Letterbox
In general, DVD-Video are produced with the intention that they will
be viewed on a widescreen TV (16:9 aspect ratio), so images often
don’t fit regular TVs (4:3 aspect ratio). 2 styles of picture, “Pan &
Scan” and “Letterbox”, deal with this problem.
Pan & Scan: The sides are cut off so the picture
fills the screen.
Letterbox:
Black bands appear at the top and
bottom of the picture so the picture
itself appears in an aspect ratio of
16:9.
Playback control (PBC)
If a Video CD has playback control, you can select scenes and
information with menus on the screen.
(This unit is compatible with version 2.0 and 1.1.)
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 96
2009/04/27 11:45:51
The PAL video signal standard has 576 (or 625) interlaced (i) scan
lines, whereas progressive scanning, called 576p (or 625p), uses
twice the number of scan lines. For the NTSC standard, these are
called 480i (or 525i) and 480p (or 525p) respectively.
Using progressive output, you can enjoy the high-resolution video
recorded on media such as DVD-Video.
Your television must be compatible to enjoy progressive video.
Panasonic televisions with 576 (625)/50i · 50p, 480 (525)/60i ·
60p input terminals are progressive compatible.
Protection
You can prevent accidental erasure by setting writing protection or
erasure protection.
RGB
This refers to the three primary colours of light, red (R), green
(G), and blue (B) and also the method of producing video that
uses them. By dividing the video signal into the three colours for
transmission, noise is reduced for even higher quality images.
Gracenote ® Corporate Description
Music recognition technology and related data are provided
by Gracenote ®. Gracenote is the industry standard in music
recognition technology and related content delivery.
For more information visit www.gracenote.com.
Gracenote ® Proprietary Legends
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright ©
2000–2009 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright ©
2000–2009 Gracenote. This product and service may practice
one or more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525;
#6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207,
#6,240,459, #6,330,593, and other patents issued or pending.
Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc.
for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of
Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the
“Powered by Gracenote” logo are trademarks of Gracenote.
Sampling frequency
Gracenote ® End-User License Agreement
Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave
(analogue signal) samples taken at set periods into digits (digital
encoding). Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken
per second, so larger numbers mean more faithful reproduction of
the original sound.
USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEPTANCE OF THE
TERMS BELOW.
This application or device contains software from Gracenote,
Inc. of Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The software from
Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”) enables this application
to perform disc and/or file identification and obtain music-related
information, including name, artist, track, and title information
(“Gracenote Data”) from online servers or embedded databases
(collectively, “Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other functions.
You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended EndUser functions of this application or device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal noncommercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer
or transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data
to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE,
OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY
PERMITTED HEREIN.
Signal Quality
This is the guide for checking the aerial direction. The numbered
values displayed do not indicate the strength of the signal, but
the quality of the signal (the signal to noise ratio, or “S/N”). The
channels you can receive are affected by weather conditions,
seasons, time (day/night), region, length of the cable that is
connected to the aerial, etc.
Thumbnail
This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to
display multiple pictures in the form of a matrix.
WMA
WMA is a compression format developed by Microsoft
Corporation. It achieves the same sound quality as MP3 with a file
size that is smaller than that of MP3.
1080i
In one high-definition image, 1080 (1125) alternating scan lines
pass every 1/50th of a second to create an interlace image.
Because 1080i (1125i) more than doubles current television
broadcasts of 480i (525i), the detail is much clearer and creates a
more realistic and rich image.
1080p
In one high-definition image, 1080 (1125) scan lines pass at
the same time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive
image. Since progressive video does not alternate scan lines like
interlace, there is a minimal amount of screen flicker.
720p
In one high-definition image, 720 (750) scan lines pass at the
same time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive
image. Since progressive video does not alternate scan lines like
interlace, there is a minimal amount of screen flicker.
GUIDE Plus+, SHOWVIEW are (1) registered trademarks or
trademarks of, (2) manufactured under license from and (3)
subject of various international patents and patent applications
owned by, or licensed to, Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc.
and/or its related affiliates.
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR
ITS RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY LIABLE
FOR THE ACCURACY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE
INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE GUIDE PLUS+
SYSTEM. IN NO EVENT SHALL GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE
INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES
BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNTS REPRESENTING LOSS OF
PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION
WITH THE PROVISION OR USE OF ANY INFORMATION,
EQUIPMENT, OR SERVICES RELATING TO THE GUIDE
PLUS+ SYSTEM.
http://www.europe.guideplus.com/
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will
terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your license
terminates, you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers.
Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership
rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable
for any payment to you for any information that you provide.
You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this
Agreement against you directly in its own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries
for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned
numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count
queries without knowing anything about who you are. For more
information, see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy
for the Gracenote service.
The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are
licensed to you “AS IS.”
Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or
implied, regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in
the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete
data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for
any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made
that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error-free
or that functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers
will be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide you
with new enhanced or additional data types or categories that
Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue its
services at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.
GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT
WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE
WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL
OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS
OR LOST REVENUES.
97
Reference
Progressive/Interlace
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 97
2009/04/27 11:45:51
Specifications
Video In (PAL/NTSC): AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3 (pin jack) 1 Vp-p
75 ,termination
S-Video In (PAL/NTSC):
AV2 (21 pin), AV3 (S terminal) 1 Vp-p
75 ,termination
RGB In (PAL):
AV2 (21pin) 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 ,
termination
Video Out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Video Out (pin jack)
1 Vp-p 75 ,termination
S-Video Out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1 (21 pin), S-Video Out (S terminal)
1 Vp-p 75 ,termination
RGB Out (PAL/NTSC):AV1 (21 pin), 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 ,
termination
Component video output (NTSC 480p/480i, PAL 576p/576i)
Y: 1.0 Vp-p 75 ,termination
PB: 0.7 Vp-p 75 ,termination
PR: 0.7 Vp-p 75 ,termination
Power supply:
AC 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz
Power consumption:
Approx. 34 W
Standby mode: (“Power Save” is set to “On”)
Approx. 0.9 W
(“Power Save” is set to “Off”)
Approx. 15 W
Recordable discs:
DVD-RAM:
DVD-R (SL):
DVD-R (DL):
DVD-RW:
+R (SL):
2X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 2−3X SPEED (Ver. 2.1)
2−5X SPEED (Ver. 2.2)
1X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1−4X SPEED (Ver. 2.0)
1−8X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1−16X SPEED (Ver. 2.1)
2−4X SPEED (Ver. 3.0), 2−8X SPEED (Ver. 3.0)
1X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 1−2X SPEED (Ver. 1.1)
2−4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2−6X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4−4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1)
2.4−8X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)
2.4−16X SPEED (Ver. 1.3)
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4−8X SPEED (Ver. 1.1)
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 2.4−4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)
+R (DL):
+RW:
Recording system:
DVD-RAM:
DVD Video Recording format
DVD-R:
DVD-Video format
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer): DVD-Video format
DVD-RW:
DVD-Video format
+R
+R DL (Double Layer)
+RW
Recording time:
Max. 8 hours (using 4.7 GB disc)
XP: Approx. 1 hour
SP: Approx. 2 hours
LP: Approx. 4 hours
EP: Approx. 6 hours or 8 hours
[EX89]
Maximum Approx. 712 hours with 400 GB HDD (EP 8 hours mode)
XP: Approx. 89 hours
SP: Approx. 178 hours
LP: Approx. 357 hours EP: Approx. 534 hours/712 hours
[EX79]
Maximum Approx. 441 hours with 250 GB HDD (EP 8 hours mode)
XP: Approx. 55 hours
SP: Approx. 110 hours
LP: Approx. 221 hours EP: Approx. 331 hours/441 hours
Playable discs:
DVD-RAM:
DVD Video Recording format
DVD-R:
DVD-Video format, MP31, WMA 1,
JPEG1, DivX1
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer): DVD-Video format, MP31, WMA 1,
JPEG1, DivX1
DVD-RW:
DVD Video Recording format, DVDVideo format
+R
+R DL (Double Layer)
+RW
DVD-Video, CD-Audio (CD-DA), Video CD, SVCD2
CD-R/CD-RW:
CD-DA 1, Video CD1, SVCD1,2,
MP31, WMA 1, JPEG1, DivX1
Internal HDD capacity:
[EX89] 400 GB
[EX79] 250 GB
Optical pick-up:
System with 1 lens, 2 integration units
(662 nm wavelength for DVDs, 780 nm wavelength for CDs)
LASER Specification
Class 1 LASER Product
Wave Length:
780 nm (CDs)
662 nm (DVDs)
Laser Power:
No hazardous radiation is emitted with
the safety protection
Television system
Tuner System:
DVB-T
Channel Coverage:
UK
UHF:
21 to 68 ch
RF converter output:
Not provided
Video
Video system:
PAL colour signal, 625 lines, 50 fields
NTSC colour signal, 525 lines,
60 fields
Recording system:
MPEG2 (Hybrid VBR)
Notes
 Specifications are subject to change without notice.
 Usable capacity will be less (SD Card).
98
Audio
Recording system:
Audio In:
Input Level:
Input Impedance:
Audio Out:
Output Level:
Output Impedance:
Digital Audio Out:
DV Input:
USB
USB port:
USB standard:
Format:
Video (SD-Video) 3
Codec:
Dolby Digital 2 ch, Linear PCM (XP
mode)
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3 (pin jack)
Standard: 0.5 Vrms,
Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
More than 10 k
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Audio Out (pin jack)
Standard: 0.5 Vrms,
Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
Less than 1 k
Optical terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital,
DTS, MPEG)
IEEE 1394 Standard, 4 Pin :1pc
Type A: 1 pc
USB 2.0 High Speed
FAT16, FAT32
MPEG2 (SD-Video Entertainment Video
Profile)
File Format:
SD-Video format conforming
HDMI Output:
19 pin type A :1pc
HDMITM (V.1.3a with Deep Colour)
This unit supports “HDAVI Control 4” function.
SD Card ([EX89])
Slot:
SD Memory Card Slot: 1pc
Compatible media: SD Memory Card4, SDHC Memory
Card4, MultiMediaCard
Format:
FAT12, FAT165 (In case of SD Memory
Card, MultiMediaCard)
FAT325 (In case of SDHC Memory Card)
Still Picture (JPEG)
Image File Format: JPEG conforming DCF (Design rule for
Camera File system)
Number of pixels: Between 3434 and 61444096
Sub sampling: 4:2:2, 4:2:0
Thawing time:
Approx. 1.9 sec (6 M pixels, JPEG)
Video (SD-Video) 6
Codec:
MPEG2 (SD-Video Entertainment Video
Profile)
File Format:
SD-Video format conforming
Others
Regional Code:
#2
Operating temperature range:
5 C to 40 C
Operating humidity range: 10 % to 80 % RH (no condensation)
Dimensions (W  H  D): 430 mm  59 mm  286 mm
Mass:
Approx. 3.7 kg
Finalising is necessary for compatible playback.
Conforming to IEC62107
This unit is not compatible with “Chaoji Video CD” available on the market
including CVD, DVCD and SVCD that do not conform to IEC62107.
3
Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from Panasonic
digital video camera with HDD etc, to HDD or DVD-RAM disc. After
Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD or DVD-RAM disc,
the playback is possible.
4
Includes miniSD or miniSDHC Cards. (A miniSD or miniSDHC
adaptor needs to be inserted.)
Includes microSD or microSDHC Cards. (A microSD or
microSDHC adaptor needs to be inserted.)
5
Long file name is unsupported.
6
Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from card to
HDD or DVD-RAM disc. After Video Recording conversion and
transfer to HDD or DVD-RAM disc, the playback is possible.
1
2
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 98
2009/04/27 11:45:52
CAUTION!
THIS PRODUCT UTILIZES A LASER.
USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR
PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE
SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS
RADIATION EXPOSURE.
DO NOT OPEN COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIR YOURSELF.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal
of Old Equipment and used Batteries
These symbols on the products, packaging,
and/or accompanying documents mean that
used electrical and electronic products and
batteries should not be mixed with general
household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling
of old products and used batteries, please
take them to applicable collection points, in
accordance with your national legislation and
the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC.
By disposing of these products and batteries
correctly, you will help to save valuable
resources and prevent any potential negative
effects on human health and the environment
which could otherwise arise from inappropriate
waste handling.
For more information about collection and
recycling of old products and batteries, please
contact your local municipality, your waste
disposal service or the point of sale where you
purchased the items.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect
disposal of this waste, in accordance with
national legislation.
CAUTION!
 DO NOT INSTALL OR PLACE THIS UNIT IN A BOOKCASE,
BUILT-IN CABINET OR IN ANOTHER CONFINED SPACE.
ENSURE THE UNIT IS WELL VENTILATED. TO PREVENT
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR FIRE HAZARD DUE
TO OVERHEATING, ENSURE THAT CURTAINS AND
ANY OTHER MATERIALS DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE
VENTILATION VENTS.
 DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE UNIT’S VENTILATION OPENINGS
WITH NEWSPAPERS, TABLECLOTHS, CURTAINS, AND
SIMILAR ITEMS.
 DO NOT PLACE SOURCES OF NAKED FLAMES, SUCH AS
LIGHTED CANDLES, ON THE UNIT.
 DISPOSE OF BATTERIES IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY
FRIENDLY MANNER.
For business users in the European
Union
WARNING:
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic
equipment, please contact your dealer or
supplier for further information.
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK OR
PRODUCT DAMAGE,
 DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN, MOISTURE,
DRIPPING OR SPLASHING AND THAT NO OBJECTS
FILLED WITH LIQUIDS, SUCH AS VASES, SHALL BE
PLACED ON THE APPARATUS.
 USE ONLY THE RECOMMENDED ACCESSORIES.
 DO NOT REMOVE THE COVER (OR BACK); THERE
ARE NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER
SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
[Information on Disposal in other
Countries outside the European Union]
These symbols are only valid in the European
Union. If you wish to discard these items, please
contact your local authorities or dealer and ask
for the correct method of disposal.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two
symbol examples):
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used
batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Cd
This symbol might be used in combination with
a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with
the requirement set by the Directive for the
chemical involved.
THIS UNIT IS INTENDED FOR USE IN MODERATE CLIMATES.
This product may receive radio interference caused by mobile
telephones during use. If such interference is apparent, please
increase separation between the product and the mobile
telephone.
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
(Back of product)
(Inside of product)
 For your safety, be sure not to connect or handle the equipment with
wet hands.
 Your attention is drawn to the fact that recording pre-recorded
tapes or discs or other published or broadcast material may infringe
copyright laws.
Reference
The socket outlet shall be installed near the equipment and
easily accessible.
The mains plug of the power supply cord shall remain readily
operable.
To completely disconnect this apparatus from the AC Mains,
disconnect the power supply cord plug from AC receptacle.
99
RQT9463
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 99
2009/04/27 11:45:52
Index
 Adjust the audio quality
(Sound menu) .................................. 67
Adjust the picture quality
(Picture menu) .................................. 67
Album (Music)
Edit ..................................................... 55
Play .............................................. 39, 42
Album (Still picture)
Edit .................................................... 53
Play .................................................... 40
Angle .................................................... 66
Aspect ...................................................74
Audio
Digital broadcast
(DVB Multi Audio) ........................ 67, 71
Disc ............................................. 66, 72
Audio Description ........................ 30, 46
Auto Renewal Recording .................. 32
AV2 settings .........................................75
 Change Thumbnail ............................ 49
Channel
Select .......................................... 19, 30
Settings ..............................................70
Chapter ..........................................37, 50
Chapter Creation .......................... 50, 72
Chasing playback .............................. 27
Child Lock .......................................... 77
Cleaning
Disc ....................................................81
Lens ......................................................7
Main unit ...............................................7
Clock setting .......................................14
Connection
Aerial ...................................... 10, 11, 78
Amplifier, system component,
receiver ........................................... 80
Digital satellite receiver ................. 11, 12
DV input terminal ............................... 29
HDMI ............................................12, 80
Television ........................ 10–12, 78–80
Video cassette recorder .....................78
Copy
Music .................................................. 64
SD Video ......................................59, 61
Still picture ......................................... 62
Title/Playlist ........................................ 56
Copy (playlist) .................................... 52
CPRM .................................................. 96
Create Chapter ..............................37, 50
Create playlists ...................................51
 Delete
Album (Music) .................................... 55
Album (Still picture) ...................... 53, 55
All titles .............................................. 68
Chapter ........................................ 50, 52
Playlist ................................................51
Still picture ................................... 53, 55
Title .............................................. 23, 48
Track ................................................... 55
Digital Audio Output settings ..... 73, 75
Digital broadcast
Digital channel information ................ 46
DVB Multi Audio ......................46, 67, 71
DVB Subtitle ..................................46, 71
New Channel ................................. 47, 74
Recording ............................................21
Select the channel ..............................19
Signal Condition ..................................71
System Update ....................................76
Timer ......................................22, 30–35
Digital satellite receiver
Connection ................................... 11, 12
Recording ........................................... 28
Timer .................................................. 28
Watching .............................................19
DIRECT NAVIGATOR ....36, 40, 42, 48, 53
Direct TV Recording .......................... 26
Discs .............................................. 15–16








Display
Digital channel information ................ 46
Status messages ................................47
Divide Title ......................................... 49
DivX .................................... 18, 38, 39, 96
DV automatic recording .................... 29
DVB Multi Audio
Record with selected audio...........21, 30
Select audio .................................. 67, 71
DVB Subtitle
Record with subtitle.......................21, 30
Select subtitle ......................................71
Show subtitle ...................................... 46
Edit
Chapter............................................... 50
Music on HDD .................................... 55
Playlists ...............................................51
Still picture.......................................... 53
Title..................................................... 48
Enabling discs to be played on other
equipment—Finalise ....................... 69
Encrypted ............................................ 46
Finalise ......................................... 69, 96
Flexible Recording ............................ 27
Format ........................................... 68, 96
FR (Flexible recording mode) .... 25, 27
FREEVIEW+ ........................................ 22
FUNCTION MENU Display ...........43, 74
Gracenote ® database......................... 64
GUIDE Plus+ ............................22, 33–35
HDAVI Control .............12, 44–45, 75, 80
HDMI ........................................ 12, 75, 80
High Speed Copy ................................ 72
Initialize ...............................................76
JPEG .................................. 18, 40–41, 96
Language
Code list ............................................ 86
Disc menu .......................................... 72
Soundtrack .................................. 66, 72
Subtitle ........................................ 66, 72
Linked timer recordings with external
equipment (SKY Digital STB/digital
satellite receiver)
—EXT LINK ................................. 28, 75
LPCM ............................................. 73, 96
Manual Skip .........................................37
Menu
DivX .............................................. 38–39
JPEG .................................................. 40
MP3 .................................................... 39
Setup ..................................................70
WMA .................................................. 39
Mode
Recording .......................................... 25
Still Mode ...........................................73
MP3 ................................................ 18, 96
Copy .................................................. 64
Edit .................................................... 55
Play .............................................. 39, 42
Music on HDD
Copy .................................................. 64
Edit .................................................... 55
Play .....................................................42
 Name
Album (Music) .................................... 55
Album (Still picture) ............................ 54
Disc ................................................... 68
Entering text .......................................47
Playlist ................................................52
Title .............................................. 30, 48
Track ................................................... 55
New Channel .................................. 47, 74
 Owner ID ...............................................13







VIERA ............................................... 45
Picture settings ............................67, 73
Playlist .................................................51
Power Save ..........................................76
Progressive .............................67, 74, 97
Properties
Music on HDD .....................................42
Playlist ................................................51
Still picture ....................................41, 54
Title .................................................... 48
Protection
Album (Still picture) ............................ 54
Card ................................................... 68
Cartridge ........................................... 68
Disc ................................................... 68
Still picture ......................................... 54
Title .................................................... 49
Q Link .................................................. 44
Quick View............................................37
Ratings level settings ........................ 72
Recording .............................................21
Aspect ................................................24
Auto Renewal .................................... 32
Direct TV Recording ......................... 26
DV automatic recording .................... 29
External Link ............................... 28, 75
Flexible Recording ............................ 27
Mode ................................................. 25
Notes ...................................................24
Relief ................................................. 32
Satellite............................................... 28
Series ................................................. 34
Timer .....................................22, 30–35
Relief Recording ................................ 32
Remote control code ......................... 86
Repeat Play .................................. 42, 67
Resume play function ....................... 20
Screen Saver ........................................74
SD card ................................................17
Select channel .....................................19
Series recording ................................. 34
Setup menu .........................................70
Signal Condition .................................71
Simultaneous rec and play .............. 27
Slideshow .............................................41
Soundtrack ................................... 66, 72
Still picture
Copy .................................................. 62
Edit .................................................... 53
Play .................................................... 40
Subtitle
Digital broadcast (DVB Subtitle) ...46, 71
Disc .............................................. 66, 72
Switch the audio/subtitles on the disc
(Disc menu) ...................................... 66
System Update ....................................76
Time Slip ..............................................37
Timer recording .....................22, 30–35
Tuning ............................................ 70–71
TV System (PAL/NTSC) ......................75
USB
Copy (Music) ...................................... 64
Copy (SD Video) .................................61
Copy (Still picture) .............................. 63
Insert ..................................................81
Play .................................................... 38
Supported formats ..............................17
VIERA Link .................12, 44–45, 75, 80
WMA ...............................................18, 97
Copy .................................................. 64
Edit .................................................... 55
Play .............................................. 39, 42
EU
 Partial Delete ...................................... 49
Pause Live TV ..................................... 43
Environment friendly printed on chlorine free bleached paper.
Panasonic Corporation
Web Site: http://panasonic.net
Pursuant to at the directive 2004/108/EC, article 9(2)
Panasonic Testing Centre
Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany

RQT9463-B
F0409ST0
© Panasonic Corporation 2009
DMR-EX79&89EB.indb 100
2009/04/27 11:45:52
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement